Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 282

SERVICE MANUAL

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS


e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C
e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C

Model: FC-5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C
Publish Date: April 2011
File No. SME100009K0
R100321I6506-TTEC
Ver11F_2015-05
Trademarks
• The official name of Windows Vista is Microsoft Windows Vista Operating System.
• The official name of Windows 7 is Microsoft Windows 7 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows 8 is Microsoft Windows 8 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Server 2003 is Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Server 2008 is Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Server 2012 is Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Operating System.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft
• products are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
• PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• FLOIL is a registered trademark of Kanto Kasei Ltd. CORPORATION.
• Mylar is a registered trademark of DuPont Teijin Films U.S. Limited Partnership.
• Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C, e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
The installation and service shall be done by a qualified service
technician.

1. Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to move it by the
casters while lifting the stoppers.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 245 kg (540.12 lb) or 246 kg (542.33
lb), therefore pay full attention when handling it.
- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when
transporting the equipment.
- It is recommended to plug two power cables into two separate outlets. Be sure to use a
dedicated outlet with AC 115 V / 20 A <for NAC/NAD>, 220-240 V / 10 A <for ASU, ASD, ARD,
AUC/AUD, CND>, 220-240 V / 13 A <for <MJC/MJD> for its power source. If two power cables
are plugged into a single outlet, be sure to use at least a 20 A one.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
- Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 30
cm (11.8”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear.
- The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be easily accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
- If the unpacking place and where the equipment is to be installed differ, perform image quality
adjustment (automatic gamma adjustment) according to the temperature and humidity of the
place of installation and the paper to be used.
- When the equipment is used after the option is removed, be sure to install the parts or the covers
which have been taken off so that the inside of the equipment is not exposed.

2. General Precautions at Service


- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cables during service (except for the
service should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a antistatic
wrist strap since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.

Caution: Before using the antistatic wrist strap, unplug the power cable of the
equipment and make sure that there are no charged objects which are not
insulated in the vicinity.
- Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp
heater and areas around them.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller,
developer, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD
backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be
touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the
power is turned OFF.
- Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
- Use designated jigs and tools.
- Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
- Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
- Do not leave plastic bags where children can get at them. This may cause an accident such as
suffocation if a child puts his/her head into a bag. Plastic bags of options or service parts must be
brought back.
- There is a risk of an electric shock or fire resulting from the damage to the harness covering or
conduction blockage. To avoid this, be sure to wire the harness in the same way as that before
disassembling when the equipment is assembled/disassembled.

3. General operations
- Check the procedures and perform them as described in the Service Manual.
- Make sure you do not lose your balance.
- Avoid exposure to your skin and wear protective gloves as needed.

4. Important Service Parts for Safety


- The breaker, IH coil, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs
including lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them
properly. If these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result
in fatal accidents such as explosion or burnout. Avoid short-circuiting and do not use parts not
recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
5. Cautionary Labels
During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels to see if there is any dirt on
their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.

[5]

[1]

[6]
[2]

[3]
[4]

[7]

[1] Identification label


[2] Explanatory label
[3] Certification label
[4] Warning for grounding wire
[5] Warning for high temperature area (Duplexing unit / Fuser unit)
[6] Warning for high temperature area (Fuser unit)
[7] Warning for high temperature area (Bridge unit)
6. Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used
batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.

Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem
Handbuch.
7. When the option has been installed:
When the EFI printer board has been installed, be sure to unplug the power cable before performing
maintenance and inspection, otherwise troubles such as a communication error may occur.

8. Handling the heat pipe roller


- When discarding the heat pipe roller, do so after opening a hole from the axial edge of the D-cut
side.
- Never attempt to incinerate it.
1. Precautions for Transporting Equipment Once Unpacked

1.1 General Description


It is recommended to follow the procedure below when you transport equipment that has already
been unpacked but has not been packed again. Note that the following procedure cannot guarantee
the operation of the transported equipment.

Item Content
(1) Gasket in Reversing Automatic Check that gaskets are not installed in the RADF.
Document Feeder (RADF) (If they are installed, remove them.)
(2) Scanning section Fix the scanning section.
(3) Drum Install a drum protection sheet.
(4) Toner Install sealing material on the toner supply opening of each toner
cartridge.
Remarks:
• Keep packing material removed at unpacking to reuse it in steps (2) and (3) above.

• Use a service jig PLATE-TONER-SEAL-4P (6LH035950, 4 pieces in 1 set) as sealing material


to be used in step (4) above.
• Do not install the accessories shown below when unpacking the equipment.
2. Precautions and Procedures for Transporting Equipment

2.1 Checking gaskets in the RADF


The installation of gaskets to the RADF, which is described in the Unpacking Instructions, must not be
performed when the equipment is unpacked but must be when it is reinstalled at a user’s office. Do not
install the gaskets in the equipment before transporting it because if it is transported with the gaskets
installed, the screws fixing the scanner may contact with the gaskets and thus damage them.

2.2 Fixing the scanning section


1. Move carriage-1 until it touches the left side of the frame. Then move it back to the right for 3
mm.
Notes:
Rotate a drive pulley by hand to move carriage-1.
P. 4-15"4.3 Scanner"
2. Reinstall 5 screws that were removed when unpacking the equipment.
Notes:
• The installation of materials for covering the holes of the scanner fixing screws (e.g. rubber
cap, blind seal), which is described in the Unpacking Instructions, must not be performed
when the equipment is unpacked but must be when it is reinstalled at a user's office.

• The installation of grounding screws in the RADF, which is described in the Unpacking
Instructions, must not be performed when the equipment is unpacked but must be when it is
reinstalled at a user’s office. Install them after you have removed the screws reinstalled in
step (2).
2.3 Installing a drum protection sheet
1. Pull out the EPU tray.
P. 4-91"4.6.1 Pulling out the process unit (EPU tray)"

2. Install a drum protection sheet on the K drum.

3. Push the EPU tray in, and then reassemble the equipment in the procedure reverse to
disassembly.

Notes:
• It is recommended to keep the drum protection sheet removed at unpacking.
• Store the drum protection sheet in a place without high temperature and humidity, direct
sunlight or dust.
• Do not scratch or bend the drum protection sheet. Avoid adhesion of dust, dirt or foreign
matter, especially things that may damage the surface of the drums or the transfer belt (e.g.
hard matter or matter that is highly adhesive, organic or chemical matter, grease) to the drum
protection sheet.
• Do not use a drum protection sheet that is damaged or deformed, or one with any
abnormality.
2.4 Installing the sealing material in toner supply opening
1. Open the front cover and then take off the toner cartridges (Y, M, C and K).

C K
Y M

Notes:
The toner cartridges must not be installed while the equipment is being transported. Pack them
separately from the equipment.

2. Install PLATE-TONER-SEAL-4P (6LH035950) in the toner supply opening of each toner


cartridge. Then close the front cover.

Notes:
• Pay attention to prevent dust from entering into the toner supply openings.
• When installing PLATE-TONER-SEAL-4P (6LH035950), be careful not to scratch or remove
the sponge that is already attached to the toner supply openings.
ALLEGEMEINE SICHERHEITSMASSNAHMEN IN BEZUG
AUF DIE WARTUNG FÜR e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C,
e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Die Installation und die Wartung sind von einem qualifizierten Service-
Techniker durchzuführen.

1. Transport/Installation
- Zum Transportieren/Installieren des Gerätes werden 4 Personen benötigt. Bewegen Sie es mit
den Rollen, während Sie die Absperrvorrichtungen heben. Das Gerät ist sehr schwer und wiegt
etwa 245 kg oder 246 kg; deshalb muss bei der Handhabung des Geräts besonders aufgepasst
werden
- Beim Transportieren des Geräts nicht an den beweglichen Teilen oder Einheiten (z.B. das
Bedienungsfeld, die Duplexeinheit oder die automatische Dokumentenzuführung) halten.
- Es empfiehlt sich, zwei Stromkabel in zwei getrennten Steckdosen einzustecken. Eine spezielle
Steckdose mit Stromversorgung von AC 115 V / 20 A (für NAC/NAD), 220-240 V / 10 A (für ASU,
ASD, ARD, AUC/AUD, CND), 220-240 V /13 A (für MJC/MJD) als Stromquelle verwenden.
Mindestens eine 20A-Steckdose verwenden, wenn zwei Stromkabel in der selben Steckdose
eingesteckt werden sollen.
- Das Gerät ist aus Sicherheitsgründen zu erden.
- Einen geeigneten Standort für die Installation wählen. Standorte mit zuviel Hitze, hoher
Luftfeuchtigkeit, Staub, Vibrieren und direkter Sonneneinstrahlung sind zu vermeiden.
- Für ausreichende Belüftung sorgen, da das Gerät etwas Ozon abgibt.
- Um einen optimalen Kopierbetrieb zu gewährleisten, muss ein Abstand von mindestens 80 cm
links, 80 cm rechts und 10 cm dahinter eingehalten werden.
- Das Gerät ist in der Nähe der Steckdose zu installieren; diese muss leicht zu erreichen sein.
- Nach der Installation muss das Netzkabel richtig hineingesteckt und befestigt werden, damit
niemand darüber stolpern kann.
- Falls der Auspackungsstandort und der Installationsstandort des Geräts verschieden sind, die
Bildqualitätsjustierung (automatische Gammajustierung) je nach der Temperatur und
Luftfeuchtigkeit des Installationsstandorts und der Papiersorte, die verwendet wird, durchführen.
- Wenn das Gerät nach der Entfernung der Extras verwendet wird, die entfernten Teile oder
Abdeckungen anbringen, damit das Innere des Gerät nicht freiliegt.

2. Allgemeine Sicherheitsmassnahmen in bezug auf die Wartung


- Während der Wartung das Gerät ausschalten und das Netzkabel herausziehen (ausser Wartung,
die bei einem eingeschalteten Gerät, durchgeführt werden muss).
- Das Netzkabel herausziehen und den Bereich um die Steckerpole und die Steckdose die
Umgebung in der Nähe von den Steckerzacken und der Steckdose wenigstens einmal im Jahr
reinigen. Wenn Staub sich in dieser Gegend ansammelt, kann dies ein Feuer verursachen.
- Wenn die Teile auseinandergenommen werden, wenn nicht anders in diesem Handbuch usw
erklärt, ist das Zusammenbauen in umgekehrter Reihenfolge durchzuführen. Aufpassen, dass
kleine Teile wie Schrauben, Dichtungsringe, Bolzen, E-Ringe, Stern-Dichtungsringe,
Kabelbäume nicht an den verkehrten Stellen eingebaut werden.
- Grundsätzlich darf das Gerät mit enfernten oder auseinandergenommenen Teilen nicht in
Betrieb genommen werden.
- Das PC-Board muss in einer Anti-elektrostatischen Hülle gelagert werden. Nur Mit einer
Manschette bei Betätigung eines Armbandes anfassen, sonst könnte es sein, dass die
integrierten Schaltkreise durch statische Elektrizität beschädigt werden.
Vorsicht: Vor Benutzung der Manschette der Betätigung des Armbandes, das Netzkabel des
Gerätes herausziehen und prüfen, dass es in der Nähe keine geladenen
Gegenstände, die nicht isoliert sind, gibt.
- Setzen Sie sich während der Wartungsarbeiten nicht dem Laserstrahl aus. Dieses Gerät ist mit
einer Laserdiode ausgestattet. Es ist unbedingt zu vermeiden, direkt in den Laserstrahl zu
blicken. Keine reflektierenden Teile oder Werkzeuge, wie z. B. Schraubendreher, in den Pfad des
Laserstrahls halten. Vor den Wartungsarbeiten sämtliche reflektierenden Metallgegenstände, wie
Uhren, Ringe usw., entfernen.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochtemperaturbereiche, wie die Belichtungslampe, die Fixiereinheit, die
Heizquelle und die umliegenden Bereiche, berühren.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochspannungsbereiche, wie die Ladeeinheiten, das Transferband, die zweite
Transferwalze, die Entwicklereinheit, den Hochspannungstransformator, den Steuerumrichter für
die Belichtungslampe, den Umrichter für die LCD-Hintergrundbeleuchtung und das Netzgerät,
berühren. Insbesondere sollten die Platinen dieser Komponenten nicht berührt werden, da die
Kondensatoren usw. auch nach dem Ausschalten des Geräts noch elektrisch geladen sein
können.
- Vor dem Berühren potenziell gefährlicher Bereiche (z. B. drehbare oder betriebsrelevante
Bereiche, wie Zahnräder, Riemen, Riemenscheiben, Lüfter und die Laseraustrittsöffnung der
optischen Lasereinheit) sicherstellen, dass das Gerät sich nicht bedienen lässt.
- Beim Entfernen von Abdeckungen vorsichtig vorgehen, da sich darunter scharfkantige
Komponenten befinden können.
- Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren
oder betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berührt werden. Nicht direkt in den Laserstrahl blicken.
- Ausschließlich vorgesehene Werkzeuge und Hilfsmittel verwenden.
- Empfohlene oder gleichwertige Messgeräte verwenden.
- Nach Abschluss der Wartungsarbeiten das Gerät in den ursprünglichen Zustand zurück
versetzen und den einwandfreien Betrieb überprüfen.
- Das berührungsempfindliche Bedienungsfeld stets vorsichtig handhaben und keinen Stößen
aussetzen. Wenn die Oberfläche beschädigt wird, kann dies zu Funktionsstörungen führen.
- Bewahren Sie Kunststofftüten kindersicher auf. Es besteht Erstickungsgefahr, wenn sich Kinder
beim Spielen eine Kunststofftüte über den Kopf ziehen. Bitte nehmen Sie die Kunststofftüten von
Optionen oder Serviceparts wieder zurück.
- Wenn der Schutzmantel eines Kabels oder die Steckerisolierung beschädigt werden, besteht
Brandgefahr oder die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlags. Um dies zu vermeiden, sollten Kabel in
der gleichen Weise verlegt werden, wie sie vor der Demontage/dem Transport verlegt waren.

3. Allgemeine Sicherheitsmassnahmen
- Die Verfahren sind zu überprüfen und wie im Wartungshandbuch beschrieben durchzuführen.
- Vorsichtig, dass Sie nicht umfallen.
- Um Aussetzung zur Haut zur vermeiden, tragen Sie wenn nötig Schutzhandschuhe.

4. Sicherheitsrelevante Wartungsteile
- Der Leistungsschutzschalter, die IH-Spule, der Türschalter, die Sicherung, der Thermostat, die
Thermosicherung, der Thermistor, der Akkus, die IC-RAMs einschließlich der Lithium-Batterie
sind besonders sicherheitsrelevant. Sie müssen unbedingt korrekt gehandhabt und installiert
werden. Wenn diese Teile kurzgeschlossen und funktionsunfähig werden, kann dies zu
schwerwiegenden Schäden, wie einer Explosion oder einem Abbrand, führen. Kurzschlüsse sind
zu vermeiden, und es sind ausschließlich Teile zu verwenden, die von der Toshiba TEC
Corporation empfohlen sind.
5. Warnetiketten
- Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
überprüfen, um sicherzustellen, dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gerät
angebracht sind.

[5]

[1]

[6]
[2]

[3]
[4]

[7]

1) Erkennungsetikett
2) Erklärungsetikett
3) Klassifizierungsetikett
4) Warnung für Erdungskabel
5) Warnung für Bereiche mit höhen Temperaturen (Duplexeinheit / Fixiereinheit)
6) Warnung für Bereiche mit höhen Temperaturen (Fixiereinheit)
7) Warnung für Bereiche mit höhen Temperaturen (Brückeneinheit)

6. Entsorgung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs
- In Bezug auf die Entsorgung und Wiederverwertung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und
Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs, einschließlich Lithiumakkus, sind die
einschlägigen nationalen oder regionalen Vorschriften zu befolgen.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem
Handbuch.
• Laseremissionseinheit

Diese Einheit besteht aus der Laserdiode, dem Fokussierungsobjektiv, der Blende und dem
Zylinderobjektiv.

Laserdiode
Diese Laserdiode zeichnet sich durch eine geringe Regeldifferenz, eine kleine Laservariation und einen
niedrigen Schwellenstrom aus.
Die Blende der Laseremissionseinheit ist unter dem Fokussierobjektiv angeordnet, um die Form der
Laserstrahlen in der primären und sekundären Scanrichtung festzulegen.
Die Laserdiode gibt Laserstrahlen als Reaktion auf die Signale der Laseremissionssteuerung (ein/aus)
von der Lasertreiber-PC-Platine (LDR) aus. Die durch das Fokussierobjektiv geführten Laserstrahlen
werden auf die Trommeloberfläche fokussiert.

Vorsichtsmaßnahmen im Zusammenhang mit Lasern


Dieses Gerät enthält eine Laserdiode, die einen unsichtbaren Laserstrahl emittiert.
Da man diesen Laserstrahl nicht sehen kann, ist bei der Handhabung der Komponenten der optischen
Lasereinheit, bei der Durchführung von Arbeiten und bei der Justierung des Laserstrahls äußerste
Vorsicht geboten. Arbeiten dürfen niemals anhand anderer als den vorgeschriebenen Anleitungen
durchgeführt werden; andernfalls kann es zu einer Schädigung Exposition durch Laserstrahlung
kommen.
Die Lasereinheit ist vollständig mit einer Schutzabdeckung versiegelt. Solange ausschließlich die
Arbeitsschritte der vorgeschriebenen Anleitungen durchgeführt werden, tritt der Laserstrahl nicht aus,
und es besteht keine Gefahr, der Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt zu werden.

Das folgende Laser-Warnetikett ist an der Abdeckung vorne rechts angebracht.

Warnhinweise:
Setzen Sie sich während der Wartungsarbeiten nicht dem Laserstrahl aus.
Dieses Gerät ist mit einer Laserdiode ausgestattet. Es ist unbedingt zu vermeiden, direkt in den
Laserstrahl zu blicken. Keine reflektierenden Teile oder Werkzeuge, wie z. B. Schraubendreher, in den
Pfad des Laserstrahls halten. Vor den Wartungsarbeiten sämtliche reflektierenden Metallgegenstände,
wie Uhren, Ringe usw., entfernen.
Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren oder
betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berührt werden. Nicht direkt in den Laserstrahl blicken.
Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
überprüfen [z. B. „Unplug the power cable during service“ („Netzkabel vor Beginn der Wartungsarbeiten
abziehen“), „CAUTION. HOT“ („VORSICHT, HEISS“), „CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE“ („VORSICHT,
HOCHSPANNUNG“), „CAUTION. LASER BEAM“ („VORSICHT, LASER“) usw.], um sicherzustellen,
dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gerät angebracht sind.
CONTENTS
1. FEATURE...................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Main Feature of e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C ............................................................. 1-1
1.2 Main Feature of e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C ............................................................. 1-1
2. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES ......................................... 2-1
2.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 General .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Copy .................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.3 Print ................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.4 Scan................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.5 e-Filing ............................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.6 Internet Fax...................................................................................................... 2-10
2.1.7 Network Fax..................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2 Accessories..................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.3 System List (e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C)................................................................ 2-12
2.4 System List (e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C)................................................................ 2-13
2.5 Supplies .......................................................................................................................... 2-14
3. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Sectional View................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Front side........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Rear side ........................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Electric Parts Layout ......................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components ............................................................ 3-28
3.3.1 Motors .............................................................................................................. 3-28
3.3.2 Fans ................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.3.3 Sensors............................................................................................................ 3-31
3.3.4 Switches .......................................................................................................... 3-36
3.3.5 Electromagnetic spring clutches ...................................................................... 3-36
3.3.6 Solenoids ......................................................................................................... 3-37
3.3.7 PC boards........................................................................................................ 3-38
3.3.8 Lamps, coils, and heaters................................................................................ 3-39
3.3.9 Thermistors, thermopiles, and thermostats ..................................................... 3-39
3.3.10 Transformer ..................................................................................................... 3-40
3.3.11 Others .............................................................................................................. 3-40
3.4 Copy Process.................................................................................................................. 3-41
3.5 Comparison with e-STUDIO5520C/6520C/6530C .......................................................... 3-42
3.6 Comparison with e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C .......................................................... 3-44
3.7 General Operation........................................................................................................... 3-46
3.7.1 Overview of Operation ..................................................................................... 3-46
3.7.2 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-47
3.7.3 Detection of Abnormality.................................................................................. 3-52
3.7.4 Hibernation function......................................................................................... 3-57
3.8 Control Panel .................................................................................................................. 3-58
3.8.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-58
3.8.2 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-60
3.9 Scanner........................................................................................................................... 3-61
3.9.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-61
3.9.2 Construction..................................................................................................... 3-62
3.9.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-63
3.9.4 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-64
3.9.5 Principle of original size detection ................................................................... 3-65
3.10 Laser Optical Unit............................................................................................................ 3-66
3.10.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-66
3.10.2 Laser precautions ............................................................................................ 3-67
3.10.3 Slit glass cleaning mechanism......................................................................... 3-68

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


CONTENTS
1
3.11 Paper Feeding System.................................................................................................... 3-69
3.11.1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................... 3-69
3.11.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-71
3.11.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-72
3.11.4 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-74
3.12 Process Unit Related Section ......................................................................................... 3-80
3.12.1 General description.......................................................................................... 3-80
3.12.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-82
3.12.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-83
3.12.4 Electric Circuit Description ............................................................................... 3-87
3.13 Transfer unit .................................................................................................................... 3-88
3.13.1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................... 3-88
3.13.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-89
3.13.3 Self steering mechanism ................................................................................. 3-90
3.14 Image Quality Control ..................................................................................................... 3-91
3.14.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-91
3.15 Fuser Unit........................................................................................................................ 3-92
3.15.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-92
3.15.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-93
3.15.3 Electric Circuit Description ............................................................................... 3-97
3.16 Exit / Reverse / Duplex Section..................................................................................... 3-106
3.16.1 General Description ....................................................................................... 3-106
3.16.2 Composition ................................................................................................... 3-109
3.16.3 Description of Operations .............................................................................. 3-110
3.17 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) .......................................................... 3-113
3.17.1 General Description ....................................................................................... 3-113
3.17.2 Functions ....................................................................................................... 3-114
3.17.3 Description of Operation ................................................................................ 3-115
3.18 Power Supply Unit......................................................................................................... 3-119
3.18.1 General Description ....................................................................................... 3-119
3.18.2 Composition ................................................................................................... 3-119
3.18.3 Operation of DC Output Circuits .................................................................... 3-120
3.18.4 Output Channel.............................................................................................. 3-122
3.18.5 Fuse ............................................................................................................... 3-124
4. DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT ......................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Disassembly and Replacement of Covers ........................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 Front lower cover ............................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Front cover......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 Top right cover................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.4 Right top cover................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.5 Top front cover................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.6 Top left cover ..................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.7 FAX cover .......................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.8 Receiving tray .................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.9 Left middle cover ............................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.10 Left top cover ..................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.11 Left lower cover ................................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.12 Bypass tray unit (Removing tray arm) ............................................................... 4-5
4.1.13 Duplexing unit front cover .................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.14 Duplexing unit rear cover................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.15 Paper feed cover ............................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.16 RADF connector cover ...................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.17 Right rear cover ................................................................................................. 4-6
4.1.18 Rear cover ......................................................................................................... 4-7
4.1.19 Upper exhaust fan cover.................................................................................... 4-7
4.1.20 Top rear cover ................................................................................................... 4-7
4.1.21 Left corner cover................................................................................................ 4-8
4.1.22 Right corner cover ............................................................................................. 4-8
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
CONTENTS
2
4.2 Control Panel .................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.1 Control panel unit .............................................................................................. 4-9
4.2.2 Control panel rear cover ................................................................................. 4-10
4.2.3 Display PC board (DSP) .................................................................................. 4-10
4.2.4 Shielding plate ................................................................................................. 4-11
4.2.5 Key PC board-1 (KEY1) .................................................................................. 4-13
4.2.6 Key PC board-2 (KEY2) .................................................................................. 4-13
4.2.7 Touch panel (TCP) .......................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.8 Control panel cover.......................................................................................... 4-14
4.3 Scanner........................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.1 Original glass ................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.2 Lens cover ....................................................................................................... 4-16
4.3.3 SLG board cooling fan (F1) ............................................................................. 4-16
4.3.4 Automatic original detection sensor <APS sensor> (S1-5).............................. 4-17
4.3.5 Exposure lamp (EXP) ...................................................................................... 4-18
4.3.6 Exposure lamp cooling fan-1 (F2).................................................................... 4-20
4.3.7 Scanner unit cooling fan-1 (F3) ....................................................................... 4-21
4.3.8 Exposure lamp cooling fan-2 (F26).................................................................. 4-22
4.3.9 Upper exhaust fan (left) (F29).......................................................................... 4-23
4.3.10 Upper exhaust fan (right) (F30) ....................................................................... 4-25
4.3.11 Lens unit .......................................................................................................... 4-26
4.3.12 Scan motor (M1) .............................................................................................. 4-27
4.3.13 Carriage-1 ........................................................................................................ 4-28
4.3.14 Inverter board (INV) ......................................................................................... 4-30
4.3.15 Carriage wire / carriage-2 ................................................................................ 4-30
4.3.16 Carriage home position sensor (S6) ................................................................ 4-34
4.3.17 Platen sensor (S7) ........................................................................................... 4-34
4.3.18 SLG board (SLG)............................................................................................. 4-34
4.4 Laser Optical Unit............................................................................................................ 4-35
4.4.1 Laser optical unit.............................................................................................. 4-35
4.4.2 Laser optical unit cooling fan (front) (F22) ....................................................... 4-38
4.4.3 Laser optical unit cooling fan (rear) (F23) ........................................................ 4-40
4.4.4 Shutter ............................................................................................................. 4-41
4.4.5 Shutter motor ................................................................................................... 4-41
4.4.6 Shutter sensor (home position)........................................................................ 4-42
4.4.7 Shutter sensor (end position)........................................................................... 4-43
4.4.8 Disassembly and replacement of the Polygonal motor ................................... 4-43
4.5 Paper Feeding System.................................................................................................... 4-45
4.5.1 Bypass feed tray .............................................................................................. 4-45
4.5.2 Bypass feed unit .............................................................................................. 4-45
4.5.3 Bypass pickup solenoid (SOL8)....................................................................... 4-46
4.5.4 Bypass paper sensor (S71) ............................................................................. 4-46
4.5.5 Bypass pickup roller......................................................................................... 4-47
4.5.6 Bypass upper unit ............................................................................................ 4-48
4.5.7 Bypass feed roller ............................................................................................ 4-49
4.5.8 Bypass transport roller ..................................................................................... 4-49
4.5.9 Bypass motor(M12) ......................................................................................... 4-50
4.5.10 1st drawer idling roller...................................................................................... 4-51
4.5.11 Bypass separation roller ................................................................................. 4-52
4.5.12 Bypass feed sensor (S72) ............................................................................... 4-54
4.5.13 Bypass paper size detection sensor (S70) ...................................................... 4-54
4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit.......................................................................................... 4-55
4.5.15 Feed roller........................................................................................................ 4-56
4.5.16 Pickup roller ..................................................................................................... 4-56
4.5.17 Separation roller .............................................................................................. 4-57
4.5.18 Transport roller ................................................................................................ 4-57
4.5.19 Drawer detection sensor (S73/S81/S89/S97).................................................. 4-59
4.5.20 Drawer feed sensor (S78/S86/S94/S102) ....................................................... 4-60

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


CONTENTS
3
4.5.21 Drawer transport sensor (S77/S85/S93/S101) ................................................ 4-60
4.5.22 Drawer empty sensor (S75/S83/S91/S99)....................................................... 4-61
4.5.23 Drawer tray-up sensor (S76/S84/S92/S100) ................................................... 4-61
4.5.24 Drawer bottom sensor (S74/S82/S90/S98) ..................................................... 4-62
4.5.25 Registration roller (Rubber) ............................................................................. 4-62
4.5.26 Paper dust cleaning brush (registration roller)................................................. 4-63
4.5.27 Registration guide ............................................................................................ 4-63
4.5.28 Registration sensor (S52) ................................................................................ 4-64
4.5.29 Registration roller (Metal) ................................................................................ 4-65
4.5.30 2nd transfer side paper clinging detection sensor (S51) ................................. 4-65
4.5.31 Media sensor (S69) ......................................................................................... 4-66
4.5.32 Feed cover sensor (S114) ............................................................................... 4-68
4.5.33 Drawer ............................................................................................................. 4-68
4.5.34 Drawer paper size detection sensor-1/2 (S79/S80/S87/S88/S95/S96/S103/S104)
......................................................................................................................... 4-69
4.5.35 Registration motor (M39) ................................................................................. 4-69
4.5.36 Feed/transport drive unit .................................................................................. 4-70
4.5.37 Transport motor-1 (M40).................................................................................. 4-70
4.5.38 Transport motor-2 (M41).................................................................................. 4-71
4.5.39 Feed motor (M42) ............................................................................................ 4-71
4.5.40 Feed/transport motor (M43) ............................................................................. 4-71
4.5.41 Paper feed drive unit........................................................................................ 4-72
4.5.42 3rd drawer transport clutch (CLT4)/3rd drawer feed clutch (CLT5)
(e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C).................................................................... 4-72
4.5.43 3rd drawer transport clutch (CLT4)/3rd drawer feed clutch (CLT5)
(e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C).................................................................... 4-73
4.5.44 4th drawer transport clutch (CLT6)/4th drawer feed clutch (CLT7)
(e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C).................................................................... 4-74
4.5.45 4th drawer transport clutch (CLT6)/4th drawer feed clutch (CLT7)
(e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C).................................................................... 4-74
4.5.46 Tray-up motor-1 (M44)..................................................................................... 4-75
4.5.47 Tray-up motor-2 (M45)..................................................................................... 4-77
4.5.48 Transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor (S47) ........................................ 4-78
4.5.49 Tandem LCF tray-up motor (M46) ................................................................... 4-79
4.5.50 Tandem LCF end fence motor (M47) .............................................................. 4-80
4.5.51 Tandem LCF standby unit ............................................................................... 4-81
4.5.52 Tandem LCF feeding unit ................................................................................ 4-82
4.5.53 Stopper opening/closing solenoid (front) (SOL10)/Stopper opening/closing
detection sensor (front) (S110) ........................................................................ 4-82
4.5.54 Stopper opening/closing solenoid (rear)/Stopper opening/closing detection sensor
(rear) (S111) .................................................................................................... 4-84
4.5.55 Tandem LCF bottom sensor (S107) ................................................................ 4-85
4.5.56 Standby side tray paper amount detection sensor (S106)............................... 4-85
4.5.57 End fence home position sensor (S112).......................................................... 4-87
4.5.58 End fence stop position sensor (S113)............................................................ 4-88
4.5.59 Standby side empty sensor (S109).................................................................. 4-89
4.5.60 Standby side tray detection sensor (S108)...................................................... 4-89
4.5.61 Tandem LCF solenoid (SOL9) ......................................................................... 4-90
4.6 Process Unit Related Section ......................................................................................... 4-91
4.6.1 Pulling out the process unit (EPU tray)............................................................ 4-91
4.6.2 Drum cleaner unit ............................................................................................ 4-95
4.6.3 Drum ............................................................................................................... 4-97
4.6.4 Drum cleaning blade ....................................................................................... 4-97
4.6.5 Blade side seal ............................................................................................... 4-98
4.6.6 Main charger unit ............................................................................................. 4-99
4.6.7 Main charger grid ............................................................................................ 4-99
4.6.8 Needle electrode cleaner ................................................................................ 4-99
4.6.9 Needle electrode ........................................................................................... 4-100

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


CONTENTS
4
4.6.10 Discharge LED (ERS-K/ERS-C/ERS-M/ERS-Y) ........................................... 4-100
4.6.11 Sub-hopper ................................................................................................... 4-100
4.6.12 Sub-hopper toner sensor (S38/S39/S40/S41) ............................................. 4-101
4.6.13 EPU cover ..................................................................................................... 4-101
4.6.14 Sub-hopper toner motor (K/C/M/Y) (M19/M20/M21/M22) ............................. 4-102
4.6.15 EPU PC board .............................................................................................. 4-103
4.6.16 Drum surface potential sensors control PC board (V0S board)
(e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only)...................................................................... 4-104
4.6.17 Auger lock detection sensor (S42) ................................................................ 4-104
4.6.18 Main charger ozone exhaust fan-K/-C/-M/-Y (F17/F1/F19/F20) ................... 4-105
4.6.19 Needle electrode cleaner detection sensor-K/C/M/Y (S30/S31/S32/S33) .... 4-106
4.6.20 Needle electrode cleaner motor-K/-C/-M/-Y (M23/M24/M25/M26) ................ 4-106
4.6.21 V0 sensor shutter solenoid (K) (SOL) (e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only) .......... 4-107
4.6.22 Drum surface potential sensor (K) (S34) (e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only) ..... 4-109
4.6.23 Drum thermistor (K/Y) (THM1/THM2) ........................................................... 4-110
4.6.24 Developer unit................................................................................................ 4-110
4.6.25 Developer material......................................................................................... 4-112
4.6.26 Developer sleeve ........................................................................................... 4-114
4.6.27 Doctor blade .................................................................................................. 4-116
4.6.28 Auto-toner sensor-K/C/M/Y (S26/S27/S28/S29)............................................ 4-116
4.6.29 Drum drive unit .............................................................................................. 4-117
4.6.30 Drum motor-K (M27)...................................................................................... 4-118
4.6.31 Drum motor-YMC (M28) ................................................................................ 4-118
4.6.32 K drum phase sensor (S44) ........................................................................... 4-119
4.6.33 Color drum phase sensor (S43)..................................................................... 4-120
4.6.34 Developer unit motor-K/YMC (M29)/(M31) .................................................... 4-121
4.6.35 Developer unit mixer motor-K/YMC (M30)/(M32) .......................................... 4-121
4.6.36 Developer drive unit....................................................................................... 4-121
4.6.37 Waste toner box............................................................................................. 4-122
4.6.38 Waste toner amount detection sensor (S13) ................................................. 4-123
4.6.39 Waste toner box full detection sensor (S14).................................................. 4-124
4.6.40 Waste toner box detection sensor (S16) ....................................................... 4-125
4.6.41 Ozone filter-1 ................................................................................................ 4-125
4.6.42 Ozone filter-2 ................................................................................................ 4-126
4.6.43 Toner filter ..................................................................................................... 4-126
4.6.44 Toner motor (K/C/M/Y) (M15/M16/M17/M18) ................................................ 4-128
4.6.45 Toner cartridge paddle rotation detection sensor-K/C/M/Y (S8/S9/S10/S11) 4-130
4.6.46 Waste toner transport motor (M33)................................................................ 4-130
4.6.47 Waste toner transport unit ............................................................................. 4-131
4.6.48 Ozone suctioning fan (F24) ........................................................................... 4-132
4.6.49 Toner cartridge heat insulation fan (F21) ...................................................... 4-133
4.6.50 Toner cooling exhaust fan (F31).................................................................... 4-134
4.6.51 Temperature/humidity sensor (S12) .............................................................. 4-135
4.6.52 Toner motor interlock switch (SW3)............................................................... 4-135
4.6.53 EPU cooling fan (F14) ................................................................................... 4-137
4.6.54 Scattered toner suctioning fan (F25) ............................................................. 4-137
4.7 Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................. 4-139
4.7.1 Pulling out the transfer belt unit ..................................................................... 4-139
4.7.2 2nd transfer facing roller cleaning pad .......................................................... 4-141
4.7.3 Transfer belt cleaning unit ............................................................................. 4-141
4.7.4 Transfer belt cleaning blade ......................................................................... 4-143
4.7.5 Transfer belt cleaner side seal ...................................................................... 4-143
4.7.6 Transfer belt unit (TBU) ................................................................................. 4-144
4.7.7 Transfer belt................................................................................................... 4-146
4.7.8 Transfer belt cam motor (M14) ...................................................................... 4-148
4.7.9 Transfer belt contact/release detection sensor (S46) ................................... 4-148
4.7.10 1st transfer roller (Y/M/C/K) ........................................................................... 4-149
4.7.11 Cleanable facing roller ................................................................................... 4-149

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


CONTENTS
5
4.7.12 Tension roller ................................................................................................. 4-151
4.7.13 2nd transfer facing roller ............................................................................... 4-151
4.7.14 2nd transfer unit (TRU) .................................................................................. 4-154
4.7.15 2nd transfer roller .......................................................................................... 4-156
4.7.16 2nd transfer roller lubricant unit .................................................................... 4-156
4.7.17 2nd transfer roller cleaning blade ................................................................. 4-157
4.7.18 2nd transfer roller side seal .......................................................................... 4-157
4.7.19 TRU waste toner box .................................................................................... 4-159
4.7.20 TRU waste toner amount detection sensor (S17).......................................... 4-159
4.7.21 TRU waste toner auger drive section ............................................................ 4-160
4.7.22 TRU waste toner transport motor (M11) ........................................................ 4-161
4.7.23 TRU waste toner motor (M10) ....................................................................... 4-162
4.7.24 Transfer belt motor (M13) .............................................................................. 4-162
4.7.25 2nd transfer roller contact/release detection sensor (S50) ............................ 4-163
4.7.26 2nd transfer cam motor (M48) ....................................................................... 4-164
4.7.27 2nd transfer cam drive unit ............................................................................ 4-164
4.8 Image Quality Control ................................................................................................... 4-165
4.8.1 Image quality control unit ............................................................................... 4-165
4.8.2 Image position aligning sensor (front) (S20) .................................................. 4-165
4.8.3 Image position aligning sensor (center) (S21) ............................................... 4-165
4.8.4 Image position aligning sensor (rear) (S22)................................................... 4-166
4.8.5 Image quality sensor (S23) ............................................................................ 4-166
4.8.6 Image quality shutter solenoid (SOL3) .......................................................... 4-167
4.9 Fuser Unit...................................................................................................................... 4-168
4.9.1 Fuser unit ....................................................................................................... 4-172
4.9.2 Pressure roller cover...................................................................................... 4-173
4.9.3 Transport guide-1 .......................................................................................... 4-174
4.9.4 Transport guide-2 .......................................................................................... 4-174
4.9.5 Entrance guide cover..................................................................................... 4-175
4.9.6 Separation finger .......................................................................................... 4-175
4.9.7 Separation plate............................................................................................. 4-176
4.9.8 Pressure roller / Pressure roller heater lamp (LAMP) ................................... 4-178
4.9.9 Fuser belt / Fuser roller / Fuser belt guide / Heat pipe roller ..................... 4-182
4.9.10 Fuser belt rotation detection sensor (S49)..................................................... 4-188
4.9.11 Fuser belt thermostat (THMO4) ..................................................................... 4-189
4.9.12 Fuser belt edge thermistor (THM6)................................................................ 4-190
4.9.13 Pressure roller center thermistor (THM3) / Pressure roller side thermistor (THM4) /
Pressure roller edge thermistor (THM5) ........................................................ 4-192
4.9.14 Pressure roller contact/release sensor (S48) ................................................ 4-194
4.9.15 Pressure roller center thermostat (THMO2) / Pressure roller side thermostat
(THMO3) ........................................................................................................ 4-195
4.9.16 IH coil............................................................................................................. 4-197
4.9.17 Fuser belt thermopile (THMP1) ..................................................................... 4-199
4.9.18 Fuser motor (M6) ........................................................................................... 4-199
4.9.19 Pressure roller contact/release clutch (CLT1) ............................................... 4-200
4.9.20 Exit paper cooling fan (rear) (F15)................................................................. 4-202
4.9.21 IH cooling fan-1 (F8) / IH cooling fan-2 (F9) .................................................. 4-203
4.9.22 IH board (IH) .................................................................................................. 4-204
4.9.23 Fuser unit jam releasing LED (LED) .............................................................. 4-204
4.9.24 VOC filter 1 ................................................................................................... 4-205
4.9.25 VOC filter 2 ................................................................................................... 4-205
4.10 Exit / Reverse / Duplex Section..................................................................................... 4-206
4.10.1 Upper exit section cooling fan-1(F32) / Upper exit section cooling fan-2 (F33) ......
....................................................................................................................... 4-206
4.10.2 Lower exit section cooling fan-1(F34) / Lower exit section cooling fan-2 (F35) ......
....................................................................................................................... 4-206
4.10.3 Lower exit section cooling fan-3(F36) ............................................................ 4-207
4.10.4 Exit motor (M2) .............................................................................................. 4-207

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


CONTENTS
6
4.10.5 Upper paper exit sensor (S61) / Upper exit tray paper full detection sensor (S62)
....................................................................................................................... 4-208
4.10.6 Lower paper exit sensor (S63)....................................................................... 4-209
4.10.7 Reverse section stationary jam detection sensor (S60) ................................ 4-210
4.10.8 Reverse path cover switch (SW5) ................................................................. 4-211
4.10.9 Upper paper exit roller ................................................................................... 4-212
4.10.10 Lower paper exit roller ................................................................................... 4-213
4.10.11 Bridge unit...................................................................................................... 4-213
4.10.12 Bridge unit front cover.................................................................................... 4-214
4.10.13 Bridge unit lower cover .................................................................................. 4-215
4.10.14 Bridge unit transport entrance motor (M4) / Reverse motor (M3) .................. 4-216
4.10.15 Bridge unit transport exit motor (M5) ............................................................. 4-217
4.10.16 Bridge unit upper cover.................................................................................. 4-219
4.10.17 Bridge unit transport roller-1 .......................................................................... 4-220
4.10.18 Bridge unit transport roller-2 .......................................................................... 4-222
4.10.19 Bridge unit transport roller-3 .......................................................................... 4-223
4.10.20 Reverse roller ................................................................................................ 4-225
4.10.21 Bridge unit exit roller-1 ................................................................................... 4-225
4.10.22 Bridge unit exit roller-2 ................................................................................... 4-227
4.10.23 Transport path switching solenoid-1 (SOL1) ................................................. 4-227
4.10.24 Transport path switching solenoid-2 (SOL2) ................................................. 4-228
4.10.25 Bridge unit path entrance sensor (S55) ......................................................... 4-229
4.10.26 Bridge unit path exit sensor (S56) ................................................................. 4-230
4.10.27 Reverse sensor (S59).................................................................................... 4-231
4.10.28 Reverse section stationary jam detection sensor (S58) ................................ 4-232
4.10.29 Exit paper cooling fan (front) (F5) .................................................................. 4-233
4.10.30 Bridge unit cooling fan (front) (F6) ................................................................. 4-235
4.10.31 Bridge unit cooling fan (rear) (F7) .................................................................. 4-236
4.10.32 Front cover opening/closing detection switch (SW9) / Bridge unit connecting
detection switch (SW8) .................................................................................. 4-237
4.10.33 Duplexing bridge unit ..................................................................................... 4-238
4.10.34 Duplexing unit opening/closing detection sensor (S64) ................................. 4-238
4.10.35 Reverse path sensor (S57) ............................................................................ 4-239
4.10.36 Duplexing bridge unit transport roller............................................................. 4-240
4.10.37 Duplexing unit upper cover ............................................................................ 4-241
4.10.38 Duplexing unit front side cover ...................................................................... 4-242
4.10.39 Duplexing unit rear side cover ....................................................................... 4-242
4.10.40 Reversed paper cooling fan (F11) ................................................................. 4-242
4.10.41 ADU motor-1 (M7) ......................................................................................... 4-243
4.10.42 ADU motor-2 (M8) ......................................................................................... 4-244
4.10.43 ADU board (ADU) .......................................................................................... 4-245
4.10.44 ADU transport roller-1 .................................................................................... 4-245
4.10.45 ADU transport roller-2 .................................................................................... 4-247
4.10.46 ADU transport roller-3 .................................................................................... 4-249
4.10.47 Duplexing unit path exit sensor (S67)............................................................ 4-249
4.10.48 Fuser transport sensor (S65) ......................................................................... 4-250
4.10.49 Duplexing unit path entrance sensor (S66) ................................................... 4-251
4.10.50 Duplexing unit cover opening/closing detection switch (SW7) ...................... 4-252
4.10.51 Duplexing unit interlock switch (SW4) ........................................................... 4-253
4.10.52 Interlock switch (SW2) ................................................................................... 4-254
4.11 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) .......................................................... 4-256
4.11.1 RADF ............................................................................................................. 4-256
4.11.2 RADF front cover ........................................................................................... 4-257
4.11.3 RADF rear cover............................................................................................ 4-258
4.11.4 Original jam access cover.............................................................................. 4-259
4.11.5 RADF left cover ............................................................................................. 4-260
4.11.6 Original tray ................................................................................................... 4-260
4.11.7 Original reverse tray ...................................................................................... 4-261

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


CONTENTS
7
4.11.8 Platen sheet unit ............................................................................................ 4-261
4.11.9 RADF exit tray ............................................................................................... 4-262
4.11.10 Reading start guide unit................................................................................. 4-263
4.11.11 Exit guide / Exit/reverse guide / Reading end guide ...................................... 4-264
4.11.12 Paper feeder unit ........................................................................................... 4-266
4.11.13 Pickup roller .................................................................................................. 4-267
4.11.14 Feed roller ..................................................................................................... 4-268
4.11.15 Separation roller ........................................................................................... 4-269
4.11.16 Original registration roller............................................................................... 4-270
4.11.17 Intermediate transport roller........................................................................... 4-271
4.11.18 Reading start roller ........................................................................................ 4-272
4.11.19 Reading end roller ......................................................................................... 4-274
4.11.20 Exit roller ........................................................................................................ 4-275
4.11.21 Exit/reverse roller ........................................................................................... 4-276
4.11.22 Exit intermediate roller ................................................................................... 4-277
4.11.23 Reverse roller ................................................................................................ 4-278
4.11.24 Original feed motor (MR1) ............................................................................. 4-280
4.11.25 Original feed motor bracket ........................................................................... 4-280
4.11.26 Read motor (MR2) ......................................................................................... 4-281
4.11.27 Read motor bracket ....................................................................................... 4-282
4.11.28 Original reverse motor (MR3) ........................................................................ 4-283
4.11.29 Original exit motor (MR4)............................................................................... 4-283
4.11.30 RADF cooling fan (FR1) ................................................................................ 4-285
4.11.31 Original pickup solenoid (SOLR1) ................................................................. 4-286
4.11.32 Original reverse solenoid (SOLR2)................................................................ 4-287
4.11.33 Original exit solenoid (SOLR3) ...................................................................... 4-288
4.11.34 Original jam access cover opening/closing switch (SWR1)........................... 4-289
4.11.35 RADF opening/closing switch (SWR2) .......................................................... 4-289
4.11.36 RADF opening/closing sensor (SR15)........................................................... 4-291
4.11.37 Original empty sensor (SR3) ......................................................................... 4-291
4.11.38 Original jam access cover opening/closing sensor (SR13) ........................... 4-292
4.11.39 Feeder lower guide unit ................................................................................. 4-292
4.11.40 Original width detection sensor-3 (SR8) ........................................................ 4-293
4.11.41 Original width detection sensor-2 (SR7) ........................................................ 4-293
4.11.42 Original width detection sensor-1 (SR6) ........................................................ 4-294
4.11.43 Original registration sensor (SR5) ................................................................. 4-294
4.11.44 Original exit sensor (SR12)............................................................................ 4-294
4.11.45 Original tray sensor (SR1) ............................................................................. 4-295
4.11.46 Original tray width sensor (SR2).................................................................... 4-296
4.11.47 Original exit/reverse sensor (SR11)............................................................... 4-297
4.11.48 Original reverse unit opening/closing sensor (SR14) .................................... 4-298
4.11.49 Original reading end sensor (SR4) ................................................................ 4-299
4.11.50 Original intermediate transport sensor (SR9) ................................................ 4-299
4.11.51 Original reading start sensor (SR10) ............................................................. 4-299
4.11.52 Original reading start sensor (prism) ............................................................. 4-300
4.11.53 RADF board (RADF)...................................................................................... 4-301
4.11.54 RADF board bracket ...................................................................................... 4-301
4.11.55 Harness guide................................................................................................ 4-302
4.12 Removal and Installation of Options ............................................................................. 4-303
4.12.1 MP-2501L/A (Large Capacity Feeder (LCF))................................................. 4-303
4.12.2 MJ-1103/1104 (Finisher) ............................................................................... 4-305
4.12.3 MJ-6102 (Hole punch unit) ........................................................................... 4-307
5. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Service UI.......................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................ 5-5
5.2.2 Login procedure ................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2.3 [SERVICE MODE] Screen................................................................................. 5-7
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
CONTENTS
8
5.2.4 Setting/Changing password............................................................................... 5-7
5.3 Input check (Test mode 03) .............................................................................................. 5-8
5.4 Output check (test mode 03) ............................................................................................ 5-9
5.5 Test print mode (test mode 04) ...................................................................................... 5-10
5.6 Operation Procedure in Adjustment Mode (05) .............................................................. 5-11
5.7 Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) .................................................................... 5-13
5.8 Operation Procedure in Setting Mode (08) ..................................................................... 5-17
5.9 Assist Mode (3C)............................................................................................................. 5-19
5.9.1 Assist Mode ..................................................................................................... 5-19
5.9.2 Operating Procedure ....................................................................................... 5-21
5.10 HDD Assist Mode (4C).................................................................................................... 5-22
5.10.1 General description.......................................................................................... 5-22
5.10.2 Operation procedure........................................................................................ 5-22
5.10.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-23
5.11 File System Recovery Mode (5C) ................................................................................... 5-26
5.11.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 5-26
5.11.2 Operation procedure........................................................................................ 5-26
5.11.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-27
5.12 SRAM Clear Mode (6C) .................................................................................................. 5-31
5.12.1 General description.......................................................................................... 5-31
5.12.2 Operation procedure........................................................................................ 5-31
5.12.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-32
5.13 List print mode (9S)......................................................................................................... 5-33
5.13.1 Operation procedure........................................................................................ 5-33
5.13.2 List Printing ...................................................................................................... 5-34
5.14 Pixel counter ................................................................................................................... 5-47
5.14.1 Outline ............................................................................................................ 5-47
5.15 Default setting / restore setting of the EFI Printer Board ................................................ 5-60
5.16 Batch Setting for Self-Diagnostic Codes ......................................................................... 5-61
5.16.1 General description.......................................................................................... 5-61
5.16.2 Applicable codes.............................................................................................. 5-61
5.16.3 Setting files ...................................................................................................... 5-61
5.16.4 Result files ....................................................................................................... 5-62
5.16.5 Operation procedure........................................................................................ 5-63
6. SETTING ADJUSTMENT.............................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Image Related Adjustment................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.1 Adjustment Order............................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ............................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 Performing Image Quality Control ..................................................................... 6-4
6.1.4 Adjustment of Color Registration Control .......................................................... 6-7
6.1.5 Image Dimensional Adjustment (General description) ...................................... 6-8
6.1.6 Paper alignment at the registration roller ......................................................... 6-10
6.1.7 Printer-related image dimensional adjustment ................................................ 6-16
6.1.8 Scanner-related image dimensional adjustment.............................................. 6-23
6.2 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)................................................................ 6-31
6.2.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ......................................................................... 6-31
6.2.2 Density adjustment .......................................................................................... 6-33
6.2.3 Color balance adjustment ................................................................................ 6-34
6.2.4 Gamma balance adjustment ............................................................................ 6-36
6.2.5 Background adjustment ................................................................................... 6-37
6.2.6 Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy and scan) ............................. 6-38
6.2.7 Sharpness adjustment ..................................................................................... 6-38
6.2.8 Setting range correction................................................................................... 6-39
6.2.9 Adjustment of smudged/faint text .................................................................... 6-39
6.2.10 Color Adjustment of Marker ............................................................................. 6-40
6.2.11 Beam level conversion setting ......................................................................... 6-41
6.2.12 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type ........................................... 6-42
6.2.13 Maximum text density adjustment ................................................................... 6-42
© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C
CONTENTS
9
6.2.14 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment ....................................................... 6-43
6.2.15 Black header density level adjustment ............................................................ 6-44
6.2.16 Black area adjustment in twin color copy mode............................................... 6-44
6.2.17 Judgment threshold adjustment for blank original ........................................... 6-45
6.2.18 Background offsetting adjustment for RADF ................................................... 6-45
6.2.19 Twin color copy / mono color copy adjustment ................................................ 6-46
6.2.20 Maximum density adjustment for each paper type .......................................... 6-47
6.2.21 ADF noise reduction (Copying Function) ......................................................... 6-47
6.3 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)................................................................. 6-49
6.3.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ......................................................................... 6-49
6.3.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)...................................................... 6-52
6.3.3 Color balance adjustment ................................................................................ 6-55
6.3.4 Adjustment of faint text .................................................................................... 6-58
6.3.5 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode.......................................................... 6-58
6.3.6 Maximum toner density adjustment (OHP)...................................................... 6-59
6.3.7 Fine line enhancement switchover .................................................................. 6-60
6.3.8 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (PS) ........................................... 6-60
6.3.9 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (PCL)......................................... 6-61
6.3.10 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (XPS)......................................... 6-61
6.3.11 “PureBlack/PureGray” threshold adjustment (Twin color print) ....................... 6-61
6.3.12 Toner limit threshold adjustment...................................................................... 6-62
6.3.13 Screen switchover ........................................................................................... 6-63
6.3.14 Sharpness adjustment ..................................................................................... 6-64
6.3.15 Adjustment of smudged text (1200 dpi) ........................................................... 6-66
6.3.16 Thin line width lower limit adjustment .............................................................. 6-66
6.3.17 Color/black judgment setting for twin color printing images............................. 6-66
6.3.18 Background adjustment ................................................................................... 6-67
6.3.19 Density adjustment of graphic lines (1200 dpi)................................................ 6-68
6.3.20 Beam level conversion setting ......................................................................... 6-69
6.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function).............................................................. 6-70
6.4.1 Gamma balance adjustment ............................................................................ 6-70
6.4.2 Density adjustment .......................................................................................... 6-71
6.4.3 Background adjustment (Color Mode) ............................................................. 6-72
6.4.4 Judgment threshold for ACS (common for copy & scan)................................. 6-72
6.4.5 Sharpness adjustment ..................................................................................... 6-73
6.4.6 Setting range correction................................................................................... 6-73
6.4.7 Fine adjustment of black density ..................................................................... 6-74
6.4.8 RGB conversion method selection .................................................................. 6-75
6.4.9 Adjustment of saturation .................................................................................. 6-75
6.4.10 Background processing offset adjustment ....................................................... 6-76
6.4.11 Adjustment of the capacity and image quality of SlimPDF .............................. 6-77
6.4.12 Surrounding void amount adjustment .............................................................. 6-77
6.4.13 ADF noise reduction (Scanning Function) ....................................................... 6-78
6.5 Image Quality Adjustment (FAX Function)...................................................................... 6-79
6.5.1 Density adjustment .......................................................................................... 6-79
6.5.2 Beam level conversion setting ......................................................................... 6-80
6.6 Scanner........................................................................................................................... 6-81
6.6.1 Adjustment carriages-1 and -2 positions ......................................................... 6-81
6.6.2 Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor ...................................................... 6-82
6.7 Paper Feeding System.................................................................................................... 6-83
6.7.1 Adjustment of the media sensor position ......................................................... 6-83
6.7.2 Separation roller pressure force adjustment .................................................... 6-84
6.7.3 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper transporting adjustment .............. 6-88
6.7.4 Adjusting the clearance of the paper and side guides ..................................... 6-91
6.8 Process Unit Related Section ......................................................................................... 6-92
6.8.1 High-Voltage Transformer Setting ................................................................... 6-92
6.8.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ............................................................. 6-92
6.8.3 Adjustment of the doctor-sleeve gap ............................................................... 6-93

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


CONTENTS
10
6.9 Transfer Unit ................................................................................................................... 6-95
6.9.1 Adjustment of the degree of the transfer belt unit parallelization ..................... 6-95
6.10 Image Quality Control ..................................................................................................... 6-96
6.10.1 Performing Image Quality Control ................................................................... 6-96
6.11 Fuser Unit........................................................................................................................ 6-96
6.11.1 Gap adjustment for fuser belt thermostats....................................................... 6-96
6.11.2 Gap adjustment for pressure roller thermistors ............................................. 6-100
6.11.3 Gap adjustment for pressure roller thermostats ............................................ 6-103
6.11.4 Gap adjustment for separation plate.............................................................. 6-106
6.12 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) .......................................................... 6-112
6.12.1 RADF position adjustment ............................................................................. 6-112
6.12.2 RADF height adjustment................................................................................ 6-117
6.12.3 RADF image skew adjustment ...................................................................... 6-119
6.12.4 RADF leading edge position adjustment ....................................................... 6-121
6.12.5 RADF horizontal position adjustment ............................................................ 6-123
6.12.6 RADF copy ratio adjustment.......................................................................... 6-124
6.12.7 RADF opening/closing switch adjustment ..................................................... 6-125
6.12.8 Original reading start sensor adjustment ....................................................... 6-126
6.12.9 Platen Sheet .................................................................................................. 6-129
7. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 7-1
7.1 General Description .......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 PM Display ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2.1 General Description ........................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.2 PM Display Conditions....................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.3 PM Display Contents ......................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.4 Counter Clearing................................................................................................ 7-3
7.3 General Descriptions for PM Procedure ........................................................................... 7-4
7.4 PM Support Mode ............................................................................................................. 7-5
7.4.1 General Description ........................................................................................... 7-5
7.4.2 Operational flow................................................................................................. 7-5
7.4.3 Operational screen ............................................................................................ 7-6
7.4.4 Access tree ...................................................................................................... 7-11
7.5 General Description ........................................................................................................ 7-13
7.6 Preventive Maintenance Checklist (e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C) ............................ 7-15
7.6.1 Scanner ........................................................................................................... 7-16
7.6.2 Feed unit .......................................................................................................... 7-17
7.6.3 Duplexing unit .................................................................................................. 7-19
7.6.4 Bypass feed unit .............................................................................................. 7-20
7.6.5 Main charger.................................................................................................... 7-21
7.6.6 Drum / Cleaner unit / Filter............................................................................... 7-22
7.6.7 Developer unit (K, Y, M, and C) ....................................................................... 7-26
7.6.8 Waste toner box............................................................................................... 7-29
7.6.9 Transfer belt unit / Transfer belt cleaning unit ................................................. 7-30
7.6.10 Image quality control unit ................................................................................. 7-33
7.6.11 2nd transfer roller unit...................................................................................... 7-34
7.6.12 Fuser unit......................................................................................................... 7-37
7.6.13 Bridge unit........................................................................................................ 7-40
7.6.14 Paper exit unit.................................................................................................. 7-40
7.6.15 RADF ............................................................................................................... 7-41
7.6.16 LCF (MP-2501) ................................................................................................ 7-42
7.7 Preventive Maintenance Checklist (e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C) ............................ 7-44
7.7.1 Scanner ........................................................................................................... 7-45
7.7.2 Feed unit .......................................................................................................... 7-46
7.7.3 Duplexing unit .................................................................................................. 7-48
7.7.4 Bypass feed unit .............................................................................................. 7-49
7.7.5 Main charger.................................................................................................... 7-50
7.7.6 Drum / Cleaner unit / Filter............................................................................... 7-51
7.7.7 Developer unit (K, Y, M, and C) ....................................................................... 7-55
© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C
CONTENTS
11
7.7.8 Waste toner box............................................................................................... 7-58
7.7.9 Transfer belt unit / Transfer belt cleaning unit ................................................. 7-59
7.7.10 Image quality control unit ................................................................................. 7-62
7.7.11 2nd transfer roller unit...................................................................................... 7-63
7.7.12 Fuser unit......................................................................................................... 7-66
7.7.13 Bridge unit........................................................................................................ 7-69
7.7.14 Paper exit unit.................................................................................................. 7-69
7.7.15 RADF ............................................................................................................... 7-70
7.7.16 LCF (MP-2501) ................................................................................................ 7-71
7.8 Storage of Supplies and Replacement Parts .................................................................. 7-73
7.9 PM KIT ........................................................................................................................... 7-74
7.10 Maintenance Part List ..................................................................................................... 7-75
7.11 Grease List...................................................................................................................... 7-77
7.12 Operational Items in Overhauling (e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C only) ...................... 7-77
7.13 Machine Refreshing Checklist (e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C only) ........................... 7-78
8. ERROR CODE and TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 8-1
8.1 General Descriptions......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 If a problem continues even after performing all troubleshooting. ..................... 8-1
8.1.2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device ...................................................... 8-2
8.1.3 Traceability label................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2 Error Code List .................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.2.1 Jam .................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.2 Service call ...................................................................................................... 8-16
8.2.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function ....................................................... 8-26
8.2.4 Printer function error ........................................................................................ 8-33
8.2.5 TopAccess related error/Communication error with external application ........ 8-34
8.2.6 MFP access error ............................................................................................ 8-36
8.2.7 Maintenance error............................................................................................ 8-36
8.2.8 Network error ................................................................................................... 8-37
8.2.9 Error history ..................................................................................................... 8-40
8.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ............................................................ 8-42
8.3.1 Check item....................................................................................................... 8-42
8.3.2 Paper transport jam (paper exit section).......................................................... 8-42
8.3.3 Paper misfeeding ............................................................................................. 8-45
8.3.4 Paper transport jam ......................................................................................... 8-50
8.3.5 Other paper jam............................................................................................... 8-66
8.3.6 Cover open jam ............................................................................................... 8-75
8.3.7 RADF jam ........................................................................................................ 8-78
8.3.8 Jam in bridge unit ............................................................................................ 8-86
8.3.9 Paper jam in finisher section............................................................................ 8-88
8.3.10 Paper jam in saddle stitcher section ................................................................ 8-95
8.3.11 Paper jam in puncher unit................................................................................ 8-98
8.3.12 Other paper jam............................................................................................... 8-98
8.3.13 Paper feeding system related service call ..................................................... 8-112
8.3.14 Scanning system related service call............................................................. 8-115
8.3.15 Fuser unit related service call ........................................................................ 8-118
8.3.16 Communication related service call ............................................................... 8-127
8.3.17 RADF related service call .............................................................................. 8-131
8.3.18 Circuit related service call.............................................................................. 8-133
8.3.19 Laser optical unit related service call............................................................. 8-138
8.3.20 Finisher related service call ........................................................................... 8-141
8.3.21 Image control related service call .................................................................. 8-157
8.3.22 Copy process related service call .................................................................. 8-174
8.3.23 Other service call ........................................................................................... 8-185
8.3.24 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function ..................................................... 8-212
8.3.25 Printer function error ...................................................................................... 8-250
8.3.26 TopAccess related error/Communication error with external application ...... 8-256
8.3.27 MFP access error .......................................................................................... 8-264
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
CONTENTS
12
8.3.28 Maintenance error.......................................................................................... 8-267
8.3.29 Network error ................................................................................................. 8-269
8.4 Other errors................................................................................................................... 8-281
8.4.1 Drum surface potential sensor control related troubleshooting ..................... 8-281
8.4.2 Troubleshooting at unpacking........................................................................ 8-285
8.4.3 Drum surface potential sensor control related troubleshooting when setting up the
equipment at unpacking (e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only)............................... 8-285
8.4.4 Equipment operation disabled after the installation of option(s) .................... 8-288
8.4.5 Wireless LAN connection disabled ................................................................ 8-288
8.4.6 “Start page” printing disabled after the installation of the EFI Printer Board
(GA-1310, optional) ....................................................................................... 8-289
8.4.7 When the duplexing unit cover open display cannot be released.................. 8-289
8.4.8 Operation of the control panel locked at the power-ON and the locking cannot be
canceled ........................................................................................................ 8-289
8.4.9 Troubleshooting for one-time dongle ............................................................. 8-289
8.4.10 Countermeasure for stain on paper back side ............................................... 8-290
8.4.11 Measures against exit paper side deviation................................................... 8-290
8.4.12 Troubleshooting for abnormal sound from fuser unit ..................................... 8-292
8.4.13 “Authentication Failed” is displayed ............................................................... 8-292
8.4.14 Hard disk full error “H04” is displayed............................................................ 8-292
8.4.15 When the First copy time / First print output time (for black) in the MFP with 55 cpm
exceeds approx. 5.3 sec. ............................................................................... 8-292
8.4.16 Error code “M00” is displayed while updating firmware ................................. 8-293
8.5 Troubleshooting for the Image ...................................................................................... 8-294
8.5.1 Color deviation............................................................................................... 8-294
8.5.2 Uneven pitch and jitter image ........................................................................ 8-296
8.5.3 Black spot / color point................................................................................... 8-298
8.5.4 Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance............................. 8-299
8.5.5 Background fogging....................................................................................... 8-301
8.5.6 Moire/lack of sharpness................................................................................. 8-303
8.5.7 Toner offset.................................................................................................... 8-305
8.5.8 Blurred image ................................................................................................ 8-307
8.5.9 Poor fusing..................................................................................................... 8-308
8.5.10 Blank print ...................................................................................................... 8-309
8.5.11 Solid print ....................................................................................................... 8-311
8.5.12 White banding or white void (in feeding direction) ......................................... 8-312
8.5.13 White banding (at right angles to feeding direction) ...................................... 8-314
8.5.14 Skew (slantwise copying) .............................................................................. 8-316
8.5.15 Color banding (in feeding direction) ............................................................... 8-317
8.5.16 Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction) ....................................... 8-319
8.5.17 White spots .................................................................................................... 8-320
8.5.18 Poor transfer .................................................................................................. 8-322
8.5.19 Uneven image density 1 ................................................................................ 8-324
8.5.20 Uneven image density 2 ................................................................................ 8-326
8.5.21 Faded image (low density)............................................................................. 8-328
8.5.22 Image dislocation in feeding direction............................................................ 8-330
8.5.23 Image jittering ................................................................................................ 8-331
8.5.24 Poor cleaning................................................................................................. 8-333
8.5.25 Uneven light distribution ................................................................................ 8-334
8.5.26 Blotched image .............................................................................................. 8-335
8.5.27 Stain on the paper back side ......................................................................... 8-336
8.5.28 White void in the halftone .............................................................................. 8-339
8.5.29 Paper wrinkle ................................................................................................. 8-340
8.5.30 Residual image .............................................................................................. 8-341
8.5.31 Feathered image............................................................................................ 8-343
8.5.32 Low density image (rear side)........................................................................ 8-345
8.5.33 Roughness..................................................................................................... 8-347
8.5.34 Image tilting on leading edge ......................................................................... 8-348

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


CONTENTS
13
9. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/HDD ...................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Removal and Installation of PC Boards/HDD.................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 SYS board cover................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.2 SYS board (SYS) ............................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.3 SYS board case................................................................................................. 9-2
9.1.4 SYS board cooling fan (F27) ............................................................................. 9-3
9.1.5 IMG board (IMG)................................................................................................ 9-4
9.1.6 LGC board (LGC) .............................................................................................. 9-5
9.1.7 LGC board case................................................................................................. 9-6
9.1.8 PFC board (PFC)............................................................................................... 9-7
9.1.9 PFC board case................................................................................................. 9-8
9.1.10 Hard disk (HDD) (e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C) .......................................... 9-9
9.1.11 Hard disk (HDD) (e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C) ........................................ 9-12
9.1.12 HDD cooling fan (F28) (e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C only) ....................... 9-13
9.1.13 SRAM board <for LGC board> (RAM-L).......................................................... 9-15
9.1.14 SRAM board <for SYS board> (RAM-S) ......................................................... 9-16
9.1.15 Switching regulator (PS) .................................................................................. 9-18
9.1.16 High-voltage transformer-1 (HVT1) ................................................................. 9-19
9.1.17 High-voltage transformer-2 (HVT2) ................................................................. 9-20
9.1.18 FIL board ......................................................................................................... 9-21
9.2 Precautions, Procedures and Settings for Replacing PC Boards and HDD ................... 9-22
9.2.1 Precautions when replacing PC boards........................................................... 9-22
9.2.2 HDD fault diagnosis ......................................................................................... 9-23
9.2.3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD .................................... 9-25
9.2.4 Precautions and Procedures when replacing the SYS board .......................... 9-30
9.2.5 Procedures and settings when replacing the SLG board ............................... 9-34
9.2.6 Precautions and Procedures when replacing SRAM board (for SYS board)... 9-35
9.2.7 Precautions and Procedures when replacing SRAM board (for LGC board) .. 9-42
9.2.8 Firmware confirmation after the PC board/HDD replacement ......................... 9-47
9.2.9 License re-registration using the one-time dongle ........................................... 9-48
9.3 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 and Disposal of HDD/Board ............................. 9-50
9.3.1 Precautions for Installation of GP-1070 ........................................................... 9-50
9.3.2 Precautions when disposing of the HDD ......................................................... 9-50
9.3.3 Precautions when disposing of the SYS board................................................ 9-50
9.3.4 Precautions when disposing of the SRAM board (for SYS board) .................. 9-50
9.3.5 Precautions when disposing of the SRAM board (for LGC board) .................. 9-51
10. REMOTE SERVICE..................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Auto Supply Order........................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Setting Item...................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.3 Setting procedure ............................................................................................ 10-4
10.1.4 Order Sheet Format....................................................................................... 10-14
10.2 Service Notification ....................................................................................................... 10-18
10.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................... 10-18
10.2.2 Setting............................................................................................................ 10-18
10.2.3 Items to be notified ........................................................................................ 10-25
11. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................. 11-1
11.1 General Description ........................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 Firmware Updating with a USB Device ........................................................................... 11-6
11.2.1 Updating methods............................................................................................ 11-6
11.2.2 Firmware type and data file name for updating ............................................... 11-6
11.2.3 Folder configuration of a USB device .............................................................. 11-8
11.2.4 Update procedure .......................................................................................... 11-12
11.3 Firmware Updating with PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1......................................................... 11-22
11.3.1 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1)..................... 11-24
11.3.2 System ROM ................................................................................................. 11-27
11.3.3 Engine ROM .................................................................................................. 11-29

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


CONTENTS
14
11.3.4 PFC ROM ...................................................................................................... 11-31
11.4 Firmware Updating with K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................... 11-33
11.4.1 Scanner ROM ................................................................................................ 11-34
11.4.2 RADF firmware .............................................................................................. 11-37
11.4.3 Finisher firmware (MJ-1103/1104)................................................................. 11-39
11.4.4 Saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1104) ............................................................... 11-41
11.4.5 Hole punch unit firmware (MJ-6102).............................................................. 11-43
11.4.6 Converter Firmware (MJ-1103/1104)............................................................. 11-46
11.4.7 Fax unit firmware (GD-1270) ......................................................................... 11-48
11.5 Confirmation of the updated data.................................................................................. 11-51
11.6 When Firmware Updating Fails..................................................................................... 11-52
11.6.1 Procedure ...................................................................................................... 11-52
11.6.2 Flow chart for correcting USB update failure ................................................. 11-53
12. BACKUP FUNCTION.................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1 Data Cloning ................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.1 General description.......................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 Precautions...................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1.3 Backup files ..................................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.4 Cloning procedure ........................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 AES Data Encryption Function Setting ........................................................................... 12-6
12.2.1 General description.......................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.2 Precautions...................................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.3 Setting procedure ............................................................................................ 12-6
12.2.4 Procedure for disabling data encryption function............................................. 12-9
12.2.5 Procedure for discarding HDD when data encryption function is enabled ...... 12-9
12.3 High Security Mode....................................................................................................... 12-10
12.3.1 General description........................................................................................ 12-10
12.3.2 Prior confirmation .......................................................................................... 12-10
12.3.3 Procedure for entering the High Security Mode ............................................ 12-10
12.3.4 Precautions.................................................................................................... 12-11
13. EXTERNAL COUNTERS ............................................................................................ 13-1
13.1 Outline............................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.2 Signal .............................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.2.1 Pin Layout........................................................................................................ 13-1
13.2.2 Details of the signals........................................................................................ 13-3
13.3 Notices ............................................................................................................................ 13-5
13.3.1 Setting code..................................................................................................... 13-5
13.3.2 Setting value change and restrictions when using the Card controller ............ 13-5
13.3.3 Setting value change and restrictions when using the coin controller ............. 13-5
13.3.4 Setting value change and restrictions when using the key counter ................. 13-5
13.3.5 Installation of External Counter........................................................................ 13-5
13.3.6 Restrictions when using the external counter .................................................. 13-6
14. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION................................................................................ 14-1
14.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................ 14-1
14.2 DC Wire Harness / Electric Parts Layout ........................................................................ 14-2
14.2.1 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C)....................................... 14-3
14.2.2 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C)....................................... 14-4
14.2.3 Electric Parts Layout........................................................................................ 14-5
15. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE) ........................................................ 1278
Input check (test mode 03) ....................................................................................................... 1278
Output check (test mode 03) .................................................................................................... 1289
Test print mode (test mode 04)................................................................................................. 1302
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C
Adjustment Mode (05) Codes ........................................................................................ 1303
Setting Mode (08) Codes ............................................................................................... 1433

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


CONTENTS
15
e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Adjustment Mode (05) Codes ........................................................................................ 1657
Setting Mode (08) Codes ............................................................................................... 1797
APPENDIX ........................................................................................................................ 2016
Preventive Maintenance Checklist (e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C)...................................... 2016
Preventive Maintenance Checklist (e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C)...................................... 2017

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


CONTENTS
16
1. FEATURE

1.1 Main Feature of e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C 1

• The open platform interface using Web Service is embedded.

• The energy saving feature is included. The electrical power in the sleep mode is reduced to
5W (approx. 1/5)

• The image quality is improved as a result of the elimination of the fluctuation in the 2nd
transfer section. This is due to the change in the drive position of the transfer belt.

• A single IH coil and a heat pipe roller are adopted.

• Adopting the new toner fusing at low temperature expands the color reproduction range and
improves the gloss of the toner.

• The life of the developer material is lengthened and the service cost for the replacement is
reduced due to the new self-refreshing development system.

• Replacing toner cartridges and supplying paper to the tandem LCF can be performed while
the equipment is being operated.

• The SVGA large color LCD (10.4 inches) is adopted for the touch panel.

• A maximum of 256 g/m2 (94.5 lb. Cover) thick paper for the drawers, LCF and tandem LCF,
and 300 g/m2 (165.7 lb. Index) for the bypass tray can be accepted.

• Special paper, such as long size (length: 484 - 1200mm), waterproof and tab paper is
available.

1.2 Main Feature of e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C

• The energy saving feature is included. Complies with Energy Star V2.0

• High security performance is included. (IEEE2600.1 supported / ISO15408 EAL3+ certified)

• A security HDD (320 GB) is embedded as a standard.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


FEATURE
1-1
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
FEATURE
1-2
2. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES

2.1 Specifications

2.1.1 General 2

Type Console
Original glass Fixed
Color Full color, Twin color
Copy process Indirect electrophotographic process
Developing system 2-component magnetic brush developing (Self-refreshing development)
Fixing method External IH heating fusing and heat pipe roller soaking systems
Photosensor type OPC
Original scanning sensor Linear CCD sensor
Scanning light source Xenon lamp
Resolution Scanning 600 dpi × 600 dpi
Writing 2400 dpi × 600 dpi (Black-and-white)
600 dpi × 600 dpi (Color, Gray scale)
Gradation 256
Paper feeding 4 drawers + Bypass feeding + LCF (optional)
2 drawers + Bypass feeding + Tandem LCF + LCF (optional)
Paper Drawers Stack height 60 mm, equivalent to 540 sheets; 80 g/m2 (23 lb. Bond)
supply
Bypass feeding Stack height 11 mm, equivalent to 100 sheets; 80 g/m2 (23 lb. Bond)
LCF (optional) Stack height 290 mm, equivalent to 2500 sheets; 80 g/m2 (23 lb. Bond)
Tandem LCF Stack height 270 mm, equivalent to 2360 sheets; 80 g/m2 (23 lb. Bond)
Paper size Drawers A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
A3Wide (305 x 457 mm), SRA3 (320 x 450 mm), 320 x 460 mm,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5",
Full Bleed (12" x 18")
Bypass feeding A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
A3Wide (305 x 457 mm), SRA3 (320 x 450 mm), 320 x 460 mm,
330 x 483mm*,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5",
Full Bleed (12" x 18"), 13" x 19"*,
Non-standard (Copy):
Width 100 - 297 mm (3.9 - 11.7"),
Length 148 - 432 mm (5.8 - 17")
Non-standard (Print):
Width 100 - 313.4 mm (3.9 - 12.34),
Length 148 - 1200 mm (5.8 - 47.24")*
* Note that black streaks may appear on the edge of the printed paper.
LCF (optional) A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R
Tandem LCF A4, LT
Paper type Drawers Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick 1, Thick 2, Thick 3
Bypass feeding Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick 1, Thick 2, Thick 3, Thick 4, Sticker
labels, OHP film, Tab paper, Water proof paper, Extra large paper
LCF (optional) Plain paper, Recycled paper, Thick 1, Thick 2, Thick 3
Tandem LCF
Paper Drawers 64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 80 lb. Cover)
weight
Bypass feeding 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 110 lb. Cover)
LCF (optional) 64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 80 lb. Cover)
Tandem LCF

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-1
Automatic Type Stackless, Switchback type
duplexing Acceptable paper size A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R,
unit A3Wide (305 x 457mm), SRA3 (320 x 450mm), 320 x 460mm,
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5",
Full Bleed (12" x 18")
Acceptable paper 64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 80 lb. Cover)
weight
Toner supply Cartridge Type
Toner density adjustment Magnetic auto-toner system + Pixel counter control system
Total counter Electronical counter
Memory Main memory 1 GB
(RAM) Page Memory 1 GB
HDD 80GB (For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes.)
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C
320GB (For hard drives, GB means 1 billion bytes.)
e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Account Codes 10,000 codes
Department Codes 1,000 codes
Warm-up time Approx. 180 sec. (Stand-alone, temperature: 20 oC)
Dimensions of the equipment W 1109 x D 698 x H 1540 (mm) <max.>
W 1109 x D 698 x H 1390 (mm) <min.>
1109 mm 698 mm
1540 mm

1390 mm

Weight 4 drawers model Approx. 244 kg (537.92 lb.) (equipment including drum)
Tandem LCF model Approx. 243 kg (535.72 lb.) (equipment including drum)

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-2
Power requirements
NAC/NAD ASU, ASD, ARD, MJC/MJD
AUC/AUD, CND
Rated voltage AC 115 V AC 220-240 V AC 220-240 V
* The acceptable value of each voltage is ±10%. 2
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated current e-STUDIO5540C 16 A 10 A 13 A
e-STUDIO6540C 18.5 A
e-STUDIO6550C
e-STUDIO5560C 16 A 10 A 10 A
e-STUDIO6560C 18.5 A
e-STUDIO6570C
Power e-STUDIO5540C 2.0 kW or less 2.4 kW or less 3.2 kW or less
consumption e-STUDIO6540C 2.2 kW or less
e-STUDIO6550C
e-STUDIO5560C 2.0 kW or less 2.4 kW or less 2.4 kW or less
e-STUDIO6560C 2.2 kW or less
e-STUDIO6570C
* The electric power is supplied to the Finisher and LCF through the equipment.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-3
2.1.2 Copy

[ 1 ] Copy specifications

Storage capacity Max. 1000 sheets or until the memory is full


Original glass Original scanning Flat surface scanning system
system (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)
Original type Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects
Original size Max. A3/LD
Reversing Original scanning Fixed scanning system by feeding the original
Automatic system (the center used as guide to place originals)
Document Original type Sheets (carbon, bounded or stapled originals cannot be accepted)
Feeder
Original size A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R
LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST-R
Original paper weight Single-sided copy: 35-209 g/m2 (9.3 lb. Bond -110 lb. Index)*
Double-sided copy: 50-157 g/m2 (13.3 lb. Bond -40 lb. Bond)
* You may not obtain enough image quality when an original with a
paper weight of more than 157 g/m 2 (41.8 lb.) is used.
Original capacity Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2) (Stack height 16 mm)
Eliminated Black copy Leading edges: 4.2 (+2.8 / -1.2) mm,
portion Trailing edges: 3.0 (±2.0) mm,
Side edges: 2.0 (±2.0) mm
Color copy Leading edges: 5.0 (±2.0) mm,
Trailing edges: 3.0 (±2.0) mm,
Side edges: 2.0 (±2.0) mm
Multiple copying Up to 9999 copies; Key in set numbers
Type Desktop type
(Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) or optional
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.)
Original table Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)

[ 2 ] First copy time

e-STUDIO5540C Black Approx. 5.3 sec.


e-STUDIO5560C Color Approx. 6.5 sec.
e-STUDIO6540C Black Approx. 5.3 sec.
e-STUDIO6560C Color Approx. 6.5 sec.
e-STUDIO6550C Black Approx. 4.6 sec.
e-STUDIO6570C Color Approx. 6.5 sec.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-4
[ 3 ] Copy speed (Copies/min.)
* “-” means “Not acceptable”.
* When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying.
* The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.

[ 3-1 ] Plain paper1 / Plain paper2 2


• Plain paper1: 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m 2 / 17 lb. Bond to 21.3 lb. Bond
• Plain paper2: 81 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 / 21.6 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond
e-STUDIO5540C, e-STUDIO5560C
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Drawer Size not Option LCF Tandem LCF
Paper size Size specified
specified
A4, LT 55 (55)
55 (55) 46 (46) 17 (17) 55 (55)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 38 (38) 35 (35) 17 (17) - -
B4, LG, FOLIO,
29 (29) 27 (27) 17 (17) - -
COMPUTER
A3, LD 27 (27) 24 (24) 17 (17) - -
305 x 457mm,
25 (25) 20 (20) - - -
SRA3 (320 x 450mm)
e-STUDIO6540C, e-STUDIO6560C
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Drawer Size not Option LCF Tandem LCF
Paper size Size specified
specified
A4, LT 65 (65)
65 (65) 48 (48) 18 (18) 65 (65)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 46 (46) 36 (36) 18 (18) - -
B4, LG, FOLIO,
31 (31) 28 (28) 18 (18) - -
COMPUTER
A3, LD 30 (30) 25 (25) 18 (18) - -
305 x 457mm,
27 (27) 21 (21) - - -
SRA3 (320 x 450mm)
e-STUDIO6550C, e-STUDIO6570C
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Drawer Size not Option LCF Tandem LCF
Paper size Size specified
specified
A4, LT 75 (65)
75 (65) 52 (48) 20 (18) 75 (65)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 54 (46) 38 (36) 20 (18) - -
B4, LG, FOLIO,
39 (31) 30 (28) 20 (18) - -
COMPUTER
A3, LD 37 (30) 27 (25) 20 (18) - -
305 x 457mm,
31 (31) 23 (21) - - -
SRA3 (320 x 450mm)

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-5
[ 3-2 ] Thick 1 / Thick 2
• Thick 1: 106 g/m2 to 163 g/m2 / 28 lb. Bond to 60 lb. Cover (90 lb. Index)
• Thick 2: 164 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 / 61 lb. Cover to 77.3 lb. Cover (115.7 lb. Index)
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C, e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Drawer Size not Option LCF Tandem LCF
Paper size Size specified
specified
A4, LT 32 (32)
32 (32) 26 (26) 8 (8) 32 (32)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 23 (23) 20 (20) 8 (8) - -
B4, LG, FOLIO,
15.5 (15.5) 13 (13) 8 (8) - -
COMPUTER
A3, LD 13.5 (13.5) 11 (11) 8 (8) - -
305 x 457mm,
12 (12) 9 (9) - - -
SRA3 (320 x 450mm)

[ 3-3 ] Thick 3
• Thick 3: 210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 / 77.3 lb. Cover to 94.5 lb. Cover (141.4 lb. Index)
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C, e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Drawer Size not Option LCF Tandem LCF
Paper size Size specified
specified
A4, LT 32 (21)
32 (21) 26 (17) 8 (5) 32 (21)
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 23 (15) 20 (13) 8 (5) - -
B4, LG, FOLIO,
15.5 (10.5) 13 (9.5) 8 (5) - -
COMPUTER
A3, LD 13.5 (9) 11 (8) 8 (5) - -
305 x 457mm,
12 (8) 9 (6) - - -
SRA3 (320 x 450mm)

[ 3-4 ] Thick 4
• Thick 4: 257 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 / 94.5 lb. Cover to 110 lb. Cover
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C, e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Drawer Size not Option LCF Tandem LCF
Paper size Size specified
specified
A4, LT -
- 26 (17) 8 (5) -
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R - 20 (13) 8 (5) - -
B4, LG, FOLIO,
- 13 (9.5) 8 (5) - -
COMPUTER
A3, LD - 11 (8) 8 (5) - -
305 x 457mm,
- 9 (6) - - -
SRA3 (320 x 450mm)

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-6
[ 3-5 ] Special paper 1
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C, e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Drawer Size not Option LCF Tandem LCF
Paper size Size specified
specified
A4, LT - 2
- 6 (6) 1.5 (1.5) -
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R - 4.5 (4.5) 1.5 (1.5) - -
B4, LG, FOLIO,
- 3 (3) 1.5 (1.5) - -
COMPUTER
A3, LD - 2.5 (2.5) 1.5 (1.5) - -
305 x 457mm,
- 2 (2) 1.5 (1.5) - -
SRA3 (320 x 450mm)

[ 3-6 ] Special paper 2


e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C, e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Drawer Size not Option LCF Tandem LCF
Paper size Size specified
specified
A4, LT -
- 17 (17) 5 (5) -
B5, A5-R, ST-R -
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R - 13 (13) 5 (5) - -
B4, LG, FOLIO,
- 9.5 (9.5) 5 (5) - -
COMPUTER
A3, LD - 8 (8) 5 (5) - -
305 x 457mm,
- 6 (6) - - -
SRA3 (320 x 450mm)

[ 3-7 ] OHP film


e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C, e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Drawer Size not Option LCF Tandem LCF
Paper size Size specified
specified
A4, LT - 17 (17) 5 (5) - -

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-7
[ 4 ] System copy speed

Sec.
Copy mode e-STUDIO5540C e-STUDIO6540C e-STUDIO6550C
e-STUDIO5560C e-STUDIO6560C e-STUDIO6570C
Single-sided originals 1 set 17.49 (18.69) 16.84 (17.22) 14.05 (17.22)
 3 sets 36.10 (40.28) 35.20 (35.39) 30.01 (35.39)
Single-sided copies 5 sets 60.74 (61.79) 53.52 (53.67) 45.84 (53.67)
Single-sided originals 1 set 22.00 (23.18) 20.51 (22.01) 22.15 (22.01)
 3 sets 43.62 (44.76) 38.85 (40.27) 38.05 (40.27)
Double-sided copies 5 sets 65.20 (66.25) 57.13 (58.50) 53.90 (58.50)
Double-sided originals 1 set 39.90 (41.32) 38.73 (40.29) 37.52 (40.29)
 3 sets 83.15 (84.46) 75.34 (76.81) 69.24 (76.81)
Double-sided copies 5 sets 126.32 (127.44) 112.03 (113.28) 100.88 (113.28)
Double-sided originals 1 set 34.60 (35.93) 34.50 (35.70) 33.71 (35.70)
 3 sets 77.84 (78.99) 71.15 (72.18) 65.45 (72.18)
Single-sided copies 5 sets 121.12 (122.20) 107.81 (108.57) 97.08 (108.57)
* Shows the period of time from when the [START] button is pressed until the message “Ready” is
displayed. (10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes above
is selected.)
* Setting: when in the Text/Photo mode with Automatic density and APS/AMS set to OFF, or when in
the sort mode with paper fed from the 1st drawer.
* The Saddle Stitch Finisher and hole punch unit not installed.
* The values in ( ) are the speeds of when in the color mode.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-8
2.1.3 Print

Page Description Language (Printer PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, XPS


Driver)
Page Description Language (RIP) PCL6, PostScript 3 emulation, XPS, PCL5e, PCL5c, PDF (emulation)
Supported OS Windows Vista / 7 / 8 / Server 2003 / Server 2008 2
Mac OS X (Ver.10.2 or higher)
Solaris (SUN) / HP-UX / AIX (IBM) / Linux / SCO
Resolution Black 600 x 600 dpi, 8bit
1200 x 1200 dpi, 2bit (PS only)
Color 600 x 600 dpi, 8bit
1200 x 1200 dpi, 2bit (PS only)
Eliminated portion Black print / Leading edges: 4.2 (+2.8 / -1.2) mm,
Color print Trailing edges: 4.2 (+1.2 / -2.8) mm,
Side edges: 4.2 (±2.0) mm
Interface Standard USB 2.0 (High Speed),
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
Optional WLAN (IEEE 802.11b/g)

2.1.4 Scan

Scanning speed Black 62 sheets/min. (Text/Photo: 600 x 600 dpi)


62 sheets/min. (Gray scale: 600 x 600 dpi)
Color 53 sheets/min. (Text/Photo)
Resolution 100, 150, 200, 300, 400 and 600 dpi
Color mode BLACK, GRAY SCALE, FULL COLOR, AUTO COLOR
Original mode [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO], [PHOTO], [PRTD IMAGE]
File formats JPEG, Multi/Single page TIFF, Multi/Single page PDF, Slim PDF,
Multi/Single page XPS
* When scanning single-sided A4/LT landscape originals using RADF

2.1.5 e-Filing

Number of Boxes Public Box 1


User Box 200
Number of Folder 100 folders per box
Number of Document 400 documents per box/folder
Number of Page 200 pages per document
Capacity of HDD e-Filing 14 GB

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2-9
2.1.6 Internet Fax

[ 1 ] Internet FAX transmission

Resolution TX Resolution Standard (8 x 3.85),


< dots/mm > Fine (8 x 7.7),
U-Fine (16 x 15.4)*
* If U-Fine is selected in TX resolution, data is converted to Fine
resolution in RX.
Scanning Original A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5, B5, B5-R, A5-R, LT, LT-R, LG, LD, ST, ST-R,
Document Size Computer, Folio
Speed 0.7sec. (per page/A4)
Max.50 spm (ITU-T No.1, A4, 8 x 3.85,Text mode)
Gray scale 256 levels (Error Diffusion)
Address book Address Book 1000 stations
Group Max. 200 stations
Transmission Features Broadcast Max. 400 destinations/job.
transmission (Fax number and E-mail address are available to registered in same
job.)
Message size Max. 100M Byte
limitation
Message Page by page
division

[ 2 ] Internet FAX receiving

Format of receive attachment TIFF-FX (Profile S, F, J)

2.1.7 Network Fax

Compatibility Super G3, G3 (ITU-T.30)


Internet Fax (Simple mode) (ITU-T.37)
TX Resolution PSTN Standard: 200 x 100 dpi,
Fine: 200 x 200 dpi,
Super Fine: 200 x 400 dpi,
Ultra Fine: 400 x 400 dpi
Internet Fax 200 dpi x 200 dpi
Original Document Size A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, LT, LG, LD, ST, Folio, Computer
Mail Box User defined Max. 300 boxes
Routed document Send to e-Filing MMR
format Send to File Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF
(SMB)
Send to FTP Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF
Send to E-mail Single TIFF, Multi-TIFF, Single PDF, Multi PDF
Send to I-Fax TIFF-S
Send to PSTN- MMR
FAX

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2 - 10
2.2 Accessories

Unpacking/Setup instruction 1 set

Operator’s manual 1 set 2


• Safety Information: 1 manual
• Quick Start Guide: 1 manual
Original feeding tray spacer 1 pc.

Power cable MJC / MJD


1 pc. <e-STUDIO5540C,
e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C>
2 pcs. <e-STUDIO6540C/6550C>

ASU, ASD, ARD, AUC / AUD, CND


1 pc.
Warranty sheet 1 pc. (for NAC / NAD)
Setup report 1 set (for NAC / NAD, MJC / MJD, CND)
PM sticker 1 pc. (for MJC / MJD)
Cleaning cloth 1 pc.
Cloth case 1 pc.
Rubber plug 5 pcs.

Gasket 2 pcs.

Blind seal 2 pcs.

DVD 1 pc.
Client Utilities / User Documentation DVD

Developer material (Y, M, C, K) 1 pc. each

* Machine version
NAC / NAD: North America, Brazil ASU: Saudi Arabia, Asia
MJC / MJD: Europe ARD: Argentina
AUC / AUD: Australia CND: China
ASD: Asia, Hong Kong, Latin America
Notes:
Check that the above accessories are correctly co-packed at the time of unpacking.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2 - 11
2.3

Operator's
e-BRIDGE

Notes:
manual pocket
Saddle Stitch 2nd Line for FAX Unit KK-8560 ID Gate (Felica)
Finisher FAX Unit GD-1270 KP-2004
MJ-1104 GD-1260 NA/AU/AS/
NA/AU/EU/C EU/C e-BRIDGE
ID Gate (MIFARE)
Exit tray KP-2005
KA-6550-ET/C
Harness kit for
Staple Cartridge Damp Heater Kit coin controller
STAPLE-3100 MF-5520E/U GQ-1200

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C
Antenna

SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
GN-3010

Wireless LAN
Module
GN-1060 Large Capacity
Feeder (LCF)

2 - 12
Bluetooth

Fig. 2-1
Staple Cartridge Hole Punch Unit MP-2501A/L
STAPLE-2400 MJ-6102 N/E/F/S Module
GN-2010

EFI Printer Board


GA-1310-EX/E-EX
System List (e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C)

Data Overwrite Enabler External Interface Enabler


GP-1070 GS-1020
Meta Scan Enabler IPSec Enabler
GS-1010 GP-1080

Hardcopy Security Kit


GP-1190

The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1050).
Finisher Finisher Guide Rail
MJ-1103 KN-1103

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


2.4

Operator's
e-BRIDGE

Notes:
manual pocket
Saddle Stitch 2nd Line for FAX Unit KK-8560 ID Gate (HID)
Finisher FAX Unit GD-1270 KP-2004
MJ-1104 GD-1260 NA/AU/AS/
NA/AU/EU/C EU/C e-BRIDGE
ID Gate (MIFARE)
Exit tray KP-2005
KA-6550-ET/C
Harness kit for
Staple Cartridge Damp Heater Kit coin controller
STAPLE-3100 MF-5520E/U GQ-1200

Antenna
GN-3010

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


Wireless LAN Large Capacity
Module Feeder (LCF)

2 - 13
Fig. 2-2
Staple Cartridge Hole Punch Unit GN-1060 MP-2501A/L
STAPLE-2400 MJ-6102 N/E/F/S

HDD Option
EFI Printer Board GE-1230
GA-1310-EX/E-EX (FIPS authentication HDD)
System List (e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C)

Data Overwrite Enabler External Interface Enabler


GP-1070 GS-1020
Meta Scan Enabler IPSec Enabler
GS-1010 GP-1080

Hardcopy Security Kit UniCode Font Enabler


GP-1190 GS-1007

The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1060).
Finisher Finisher Guide Rail
MJ-1103 KN-1103

SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C
2
2.5 Supplies

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Drum OD-FC55 (except for China) <-
OD-FC55C (for China) <-

Toner cartridge (K) PS-ZTFC65K PS-ZTFC75UK (for North America)


(for North America, Central and South
America)
PS-ZTFC65EK (for Europe) PS-ZTFC75EK (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC65DK PS-ZTFC75DK (for Australia)
(for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC65CK (for China) <-
PS-ZTFC65AK (for Argentina) PS-ZTFC75AK (for Argentina)
- PS-ZTFC75PK (for Others)
Toner cartridge (Y) PS-ZTFC65Y PS-ZTFC75UY (for North America)
(for North America, Central and South
America)
PS-ZTFC65EY (for Europe) PS-ZTFC75EY (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC65DY PS-ZTFC75DY (for Australia)
(for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC65CY (for China) <-
PS-ZTFC65AY (for Argentina) PS-ZTFC75AY (for Argentina)
- PS-ZTFC75PY (for Others)
Toner cartridge (M) PS-ZTFC65M PS-ZTFC75UM (for North America)
(for North America, Central and South
America)
PS-ZTFC65EM (for Europe) PS-ZTFC75EM (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC65DM PS-ZTFC75DM (for Australia)
(for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC65CM (for China) <-
PS-ZTFC65AM (for Argentina) PS-ZTFC75AM (for Argentina)
- PS-ZTFC75PM (for Others)
Toner cartridge (C) PS-ZTFC65C PS-ZTFC75UC (for North America)
(for North America, Central and South
America)
PS-ZTFC65EC (for Europe) PS-ZTFC75EC (for Europe)
PS-ZTFC65DC PS-ZTFC75DC (for Australia)
(for Australia and Asia)
PS-ZTFC65CC (for China) <-
PS-ZTFC65AC (for Argentina) PS-ZTFC75AC (for Argentina)
- PS-ZTFC75PC (for Others)
Waste toner box PS-TBFC55 (except for Europe and China) <-
PS-TBFC55E (for Europe) <-
PS-TBFC55C (for China) <-

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
2 - 14
3. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE

3.1 Sectional View

3.1.1 Front side

[1] 3

[2]
[4]

[3]

[5]

[12]
[6]
[13]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[14]

[15]

[16] [10]

[17]
[11]

Fig. 3-1

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-1
No Name No Name
[1] [ON/OFF] button [10] Bypass feed unit
[2] Control Panel [11] Paper Feeding System
[3] Exit tray [12] Exit / Reverse Section
[4] Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) [13] Toner cartridge
[5] Scanner [14] Transfer belt unit
[6] Main power switch [15] Process Unit Related Section
[7] Fuser Unit [16] Laser Optical Unit
[8] 2nd transfer unit [17] Waste toner box
[9] Duplex Section

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-2
3.1.2 Rear side

MR4 MR3 MR1 MR2

M2
M15
M1 M5 M16
M4 M3 M17
M7 M18
M6
M8
M13 M19 M20 M21 M22 M29
M48 M30
M31
M10 M32
M27 M28
M11
M39

M12

M40 M34 M37 M36 M35 M38

M42 M33
M41
M43
M44

M46 M47

M45

Fig. 3-2

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-3
3.2 Electric Parts Layout
[A] Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)

SWR2
SR13 SR15 SR2 SR1
SWR1

SR3

SR7

SR6

SR5

SR12
SR14
SR8
SR10

SR9
SR4 SR11

Fig. 3-3

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-4
RADF
MR4

MR1

MR2 3

FR1

SOLR2
SOLR3
MR3 SOLR1

Fig. 3-4

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-5
[B] Scanner unit

M1
INV S5 (A4 series)
S7 S5 (LT series)
S6 F1
F3
SLG

CCD

S4
EXP
S3
(A4 series only)
F2 S1

S2
F26

Fig. 3-5

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-6
[C] Bridge unit/Paper exit

M4 F7 S59
3
M3
M5 S57
M2
DRV

S55

F6
S61
SW5
SOL1
S60

S62 SOL2

S63
F5

S58

S56

Fig. 3-6

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-7
[D] Fuser related section

THMP1
THMO4
CLT1

F15

M6
THM6
S48

THM4
S65

THMO2

F21 THM3
THMO3
THM5
S49

Fig. 3-7

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-8
F8
F9 3
IH

IH-COIL

LAMP
Center heater lamp,
Side heater lamp,
Sub heater lamp
(for e-STUDIO5540C
/6540C/6550C
MJC, MJD)

Fig. 3-8

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-9
[E] Developer unit

M27

M28

S43
S44

M32 M29
M30

M31

Fig. 3-9

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 10
THM1
S34
3

S30

S12

S31 S26
S32
THM2 S27
S33
S28
S29

Fig. 3-10

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 11
ERS-K
ERS-C SOL4
M23
ERS-M M24

M25
M20
ERS-Y M19
M26

F17

F18

M22 EPU
F20
F19 V0S
M21

Fig. 3-11

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 12
[F] Transfer belt unit

M13 3
M14

S46

Fig. 3-12

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 13
[G] Transfer unit

SOL3
S22

M48

S23 M39

M11

M10

S50

S47
S52
S20
S21 S51

Fig. 3-13

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 14
[H] Laser unit

SNS
M37
M34
F23 3
M36
M35

LDR-K

LDR-M

F22

S25

S24 LDR-C

M38 LDR-Y

Fig. 3-14

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 15
[I] Toner cartridge/Waste toner box

M15
M16
M17
M18

S8

S9
S10

S11

S42

M33 S38
S39
S40
S14 S41
S16
S13

Fig. 3-15

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 16
[J] Automatic duplexing unit

3
S64
F11
SW7

M7

ADU

SW2

LED

SW4

S66
S67
M8

Fig. 3-16

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 17
[K] Cover switches/Cover sensor/TRU waste toner box

SW8

SW9

SW3 S17

SW1

S114

Fig. 3-17

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 18
[L] Bypass feed unit

S71

SOL8

M12

S70

S69
S72

Fig. 3-18

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 19
[M] Paper feeding section

S74
M43

M40

M42
M41
CLT4
CLT5
CLT6
CLT7
S80 S79
S82
S88 S87 S90

S96 S95
S98
M44 M45
S104 S103

Fig. 3-19

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 20
3

S73
S75
S76
S81
S77 S83
S78 S84
S89
S85 S91
S86 S92
S97
S93 S99
S94 S100
S101
S102

Fig. 3-20

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 21
[N] Tandem LCF

S111

M47

M46

SOL9
S106

S112 SOL11
S107
S110 S108
SOL10 S109
S113

Fig. 3-21

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 22
[O] PC boards

F28
(e-STUDIO5540C/
6540C/6550C Only)

HDD

RAM-S IMG

SYS LGC

RAM-L

PFC

F27

FIL

Fig. 3-22

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 23
[P] Power supply

HVT1

HVT2

PS

F37 F38
BRK

Fig. 3-23

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 24
[Q] Fans

F30
F29
3
F32

F34

F33
F31

F35

F36

F25

F24 F14

Fig. 3-24

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 25
[R] Damp heater

DH1

THMO1

DH2

DH3

Fig. 3-25

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 26
[S] Control panel

DSP

KEY1

TCP

KEY2

Fig. 3-26

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 27
3.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components
The column “P-I” shows the page and item number in the parts list.

3.3.1 Motors

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


MR1 Original feed motor Driving the original feed roller, pickup Fig. 3-4 87-14
roller and registration roller
MR2 Read motor Transporting originals by driving the Fig. 3-4 87-7
intermediate transport roller, front read
roller, rear read roller and reverse
registration roller
MR3 Original reverse motor Driving the original reverse roller Fig. 3-4 87-28
MR4 Original exit motor Driving the original exit roller Fig. 3-4 87-9

M1 Scan motor Driving the carriages Fig. 3-5 51-9


M2 Exit motor Driving the exit roller Fig. 3-5 37-6
M3 Reverse motor Driving the reverse section Fig. 3-6 23-36
M4 Bridge unit transport entrance motor Driving the entrance transport roller of Fig. 3-6 23-36
the bridge unit
M5 Bridge unit transport exit motor Driving the bridge unit exit transport Fig. 3-6 23-36
roller of the bridge unit
M6 Fuser motor Driving the fuser Fig. 3-7 39-42
M7 ADU motor-1 Driving the automatic duplexing unit Fig. 3-16 18-2
M8 ADU motor-2 Driving the automatic duplexing unit Fig. 3-16 18-2
M10 TRU waste toner motor Flat (horizontal) transporting waste Fig. 3-13 21-13
toner in the TRU
M11 TRU waste toner transport motor Vertical transporting waste toner in the Fig. 3-13 27-55
TRU
M12 Bypass motor Feeding/transporting paper in bypass Fig. 3-18 15-77
unit
M13 Transfer belt motor Driving the transfer belt Fig. 3-12 32-23
M14 Transfer belt cam motor Driving the contact/release movement Fig. 3-12 32-18
of the transfer belt
M15 Toner motor-K Toner supply from the K toner cartridge Fig. 3-15 45-8
to the K sub-hopper
M16 Toner motor-C Toner supply from the C toner cartridge Fig. 3-15 45-9
to the C sub-hopper
M17 Toner motor-M Toner supply from the M toner cartridge Fig. 3-15 45-9
to the M sub-hopper
M18 Toner motor-Y Toner supply from the Y toner cartridge Fig. 3-15 45-9
to the Y sub-hopper
M19 Sub-hopper toner motor-K Normal rotation: Fig. 3-11 60-13
Toner supply from the K sub-hopper to
the K developer unit and mixing toner
in the K sub-hopper
Reverse rotation:
Mixing toner in the K sub-hopper
M20 Sub-hopper toner motor-C Normal rotation: Fig. 3-11 60-13
Toner supply from the C sub-hopper to
the C developer unit and mixing toner
in the C sub-hopper
Reverse rotation:
Mixing toner in the C sub-hopper

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 28
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I
M21 Sub-hopper toner motor-M Normal rotation: Fig. 3-11 60-13
Toner supply from the M sub-hopper to
the M developer unit and mixing toner
in the M sub-hopper
Reverse rotation:
Mixing toner in the M sub-hopper
M22 Sub-hopper toner motor-Y Normal rotation: Fig. 3-11 60-13
Toner supply from the Y sub-hopper to
the Y developer unit and mixing toner 3
in the Y sub-hopper
Reverse rotation:
Mixing toner in the Y sub-hopper
M23 Needle electrode cleaner motor-K Driving the needle electrode cleaner-K Fig. 3-11 59-11
M24 Needle electrode cleaner motor-C Driving the needle electrode cleaner-C Fig. 3-11 59-11
M25 Needle electrode cleaner motor-M Driving the needle electrode cleaner-M Fig. 3-11 59-11
M26 Needle electrode cleaner motor-Y Driving the needle electrode cleaner-Y Fig. 3-11 59-11
M27 Drum motor-K Driving the K drum Fig. 3-9 56-3
M28 Drum motor-YMC Driving the Y, M and C drums Fig. 3-9 56-2
M29 Developer unit motor-K Driving the K developer sleeve Fig. 3-9 55-21
(magnetic roller) and toner recovery
auger
M30 Developer unit mixer motor-K Mixing the K developer material Fig. 3-9 55-20
M31 Developer unit motor-YMC Driving the Y, M and C developer Fig. 3-9 55-22
sleeve (magnetic roller) and toner
recovery auger
M32 Developer unit mixer motor-YMC Mixing the Y, M and C developer Fig. 3-9 55-21
materials
M33 Waste toner transport motor Transporting waste toner Fig. 3-15 65-37
M34 Polygonal motor Driving the polygonal mirror Fig. 3-14 48-1
M35 Mirror motor-M Adjusting the irradiation angle of the M Fig. 3-14 48-1
laser
M36 Mirror motor-C Adjusting the irradiation angle of the C Fig. 3-14 48-1
laser
M37 Mirror motor-K Adjusting the irradiation angle of the K Fig. 3-14 48-1
laser
M38 Shutter motor Driving the laser emission outlet (slit Fig. 3-14 48-1
glass) protective shutter
M39 Registration motor Driving the registration roller Fig. 3-13 10-22
M40 Transport motor-1 Driving the intermediate transport Fig. 3-19 8-3
roller-1
M41 Transport motor-2 Driving the intermediate transport Fig. 3-19 8-3
roller-2
M42 Feed motor Driving the feed roller and pickup roller Fig. 3-19 8-3
of the 1st and 2nd drawers
M43 Feed/transport motor Driving the feed roller and the transport Fig. 3-19 9-50
roller of the 3rd and 4th drawers
M44 Tray-up motor-1 Lifting up the trays in the 1st and 2nd Fig. 3-19 66-7
drawers
M45 Tray-up motor-2 Lifting up the trays in the 3rd and 4th Fig. 3-19 66-7
drawers
M46 Tandem LCF tray-up motor Lifting up the tray in the tandem LCF Fig. 3-21 12-19
M47 Tandem LCF end fence motor Driving the end fence in the tandem Fig. 3-21 12-19
LCF
M48 2nd transfer cam motor Driving the contacting/releasing Fig. 3-13 28-50
operation of the 2nd transfer roller

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 29
3.3.2 Fans

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


FR1 RADF cooling fan Cools off the RADF drive section. Fig. 3-4 89-16

F1 SLG board cooling fan Cooling down the SLG board Fig. 3-5 54-28
F2 Exposure lamp cooling fan-1 Cooling down the exposure lamp Fig. 3-5 50-25
F3 Scanner unit cooling fan-1 Cooling down the scanner unit Fig. 3-5 50-15
F5 Exit paper cooling fan (front) Cooling down the exiting/reversed Fig. 3-6 49-56
paper and scanner unit, and avoiding
exposure to water
F6 Bridge unit cooling fan (front) Cooling down the exiting/reversed Fig. 3-6 44-62
paper and scanner unit, and avoiding
exposure to water
F7 Bridge unit cooling fan (rear) Cooling down the exiting/reversed Fig. 3-6 45-66
paper, scanner unit, bridge unit
transport motor and reverse motor, and
avoiding exposure to water
F8 IH board cooling fan-1 Cooling down the IH board Fig. 3-8 38-29
F9 IH board cooling fan-2 Cooling down the IH board Fig. 3-8 38-29
F11 Reversed paper cooling fan Cooling down the reversed paper Fig. 3-16 18-26
F14 EPU cooling fan Cooling down the developer unit (EPU) Fig. 3-24 49-27
F15 Exit paper cooling fan (rear) Cooling down the exiting/reversed Fig. 3-7 49-43
paper and scanner unit, and avoiding
exposure to water
F17 Main charger blowing fan-K Preventing the main charger unit-K Fig. 3-11 59-2
from being stained
F18 Main charger blowing fan-C Preventing the main charger unit-C Fig. 3-11 59-2
from being stained
F19 Main charger blowing fan-M Preventing the main charger unit-M Fig. 3-11 59-2
from being stained
F20 Main charger blowing fan-Y Preventing the main charger unit-Y Fig. 3-11 59-3
from being stained
F21 Toner cartridge heat insulation fan Insulating and cooling down the toner Fig. 3-7 49-48
cartridge
F22 Laser optical unit cooling fan (Front) Cooling down the laser optical unit Fig. 3-14 48-8
F23 Laser optical unit cooling fan (Rear) Cooling down the laser optical unit, Fig. 3-14 49-21
transport motor and feed motor
F24 Ozone suctioning fan Suctioning ozone generated at Fig. 3-24 49-2
charging
F25 Scattered toner suctioning fan Suctioning toner scattering from the Fig. 3-24 49-7
developer sleeve
F26 Exposure lamp cooling fan-2 Cooling down the exposure lamp Fig. 3-5 50-25
F27 SYS board cooling fan Cooling down the SYS board Fig. 3-22 68-9
F28 HDD cooling fan Cooling down the hard disk Fig. 3-22 68-8
(e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C only)
F29 Upper exhaust fan (left) Exhausting the heat inside (upper) the Fig. 3-24 49-101
F30 Upper exhaust fan (right) equipment Fig. 3-24 49-101
F31 Toner cooling exhaust fan Exhausting the heat inside the Fig. 3-24 47-29
equipment so as not to conduct it to the
toner
F32 Upper exit section cooling fan-1 Cooling the paper which exits in the Fig. 3-24 36-101
F33 Upper exit section cooling fan-2 upper exit section Fig. 3-24 36-101
F34 Lower exit section cooling fan-1 Cooling the paper which exits in the Fig. 3-24 35-45
F35 Lower exit section cooling fan-2 lower exit section Fig. 3-24 35-45
F36 Lower exit section cooling fan-3 Fig. 3-24 49-60

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 30
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I
F37 Power supply unit cooling fan-1 Cooling down the power supply unit Fig. 3-23 70-26
F38 Power supply unit cooling fan-2 Fig. 3-23 70-26

3.3.3 Sensors

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


SR1 Original tray sensor Detects the length of the original set on Fig. 3-3 93-2 3
the original tray.
SR2 Original tray width sensor Detects the width of the original set on Fig. 3-3 93-12
the original tray.
SR3 Original empty sensor Detects the original set on the original Fig. 3-3 81-3
tray.
SR4 Original reading end sensor Detecting the trailing edge of the Fig. 3-3 85-5
original at the original scanning section
SR5 Original registration sensor Detects transport of the original at the Fig. 3-3 82-14
registration roller section.
SR6 Original width detection sensor-1 Detects the width of the original. Fig. 3-3 82-14
SR7 Original width detection sensor-2 Detects the width of the original. Fig. 3-3 82-14
SR8 Original width detection sensor-3 Detects the width of the original. Fig. 3-3 82-14
SR9 Original intermediate transport sensor Detects the original transported to the Fig. 3-3 85-25
pre-scanning section.
SR10 Original reading start sensor Detects the leading edge of the original Fig. 3-3 85-23
at the original scanning section.
SR11 Original exit/reverse sensor Detects the stop reference position for Fig. 3-3 86-14
an original when in reverse.
SR12 Original exit sensor Detects the exit (transit) of an original. Fig. 3-3 83-10
SR13 Original jam access cover opening/ Detects opening/closing of the Jam Fig. 3-3 81-3
closing sensor access cover.
SR14 Original reverse unit opening/closing Detecting the opening/closing status of Fig. 3-3 85-6
sensor the original reverse unit.
SR15 RADF opening/closing sensor Detecting the opening/closing status of Fig. 3-3 88-2
the RADF.

S1 Automatic original detection sensor Detecting original size Fig. 3-5 54-11
(APS-2) (only for A4 series models)
S2 Automatic original detection sensor Detecting original size Fig. 3-5 54-11
(APS-C)
S3 Automatic original detection sensor Detecting original size Fig. 3-5 54-11
(APS-1)
S4 Automatic original detection sensor Detecting original size Fig. 3-5 54-11
(APS-3)
S5 Automatic original detection sensor Detecting original size Fig. 3-5 54-14
(APS-R)
S6 Carriage home position sensor Detecting the carriage home position Fig. 3-5 54-18
S7 Platen sensor Detecting the opening/closing status of Fig. 3-5 51-23
the RADF
S8 Toner cartridge paddle rotation Detecting the paddle rotation in the K Fig. 3-15 45-11
detection sensor-K toner cartridge
S9 Toner cartridge paddle rotation Detecting the paddle rotation in the C Fig. 3-15 45-11
detection sensor-C toner cartridge
S10 Toner cartridge paddle rotation Detecting the paddle rotation in the M Fig. 3-15 45-11
detection sensor-M toner cartridge
S11 Toner cartridge paddle rotation Detecting the paddle rotation in the Y Fig. 3-15 45-11
detection sensor-Y toner cartridge
S12 Temperature/humidity sensor Detecting the ambient temperature/ Fig. 3-10 48-12
humidity of the equipment

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 31
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I
S13 Waste toner amount detection sensor Detecting the amount of waste toner in Fig. 3-15 65-45
the waste toner box
S14 Waste toner box full detection sensor Detecting the full status of waste toner Fig. 3-15 65-45
in the waste toner box
S16 Waste toner detection sensor Detecting the presence of the waste Fig. 3-15 5-17
toner box and the opening/closing
status of the waste toner box cover
S17 TRU waste toner amount detection Detecting the amount of waste toner in Fig. 3-17 27-46
sensor the TRU waste toner box
S20 Image position aligning sensor (front) Detecting the front side position of a Fig. 3-13 6-5
toner image (test pattern) developed on
the transfer belt
S21 Image position aligning sensor Detecting the center position of a toner Fig. 3-13 6-5
(center) image (test pattern) developed on the
transfer belt
S22 Image position aligning sensor (rear) Detecting the rear side position of a Fig. 3-13 6-5
toner image (test pattern) developed on
the transfer belt
S23 Image quality sensor Detecting the density of a toner image Fig. 3-13 6-6
(test pattern) developed on the transfer
belt surface
S24 Shutter sensor (home position) Detecting the home position of the Fig. 3-14 48-1
laser emission outlet (slit glass)
protective shutter
S25 Shutter sensor (end position) Detecting the end position of the laser Fig. 3-14 48-1
emission outlet (slit glass) protective
shutter
S26 Auto-toner sensor-K Detecting the toner density in the K Fig. 3-10 62-20
developer unit
S27 Auto-toner sensor-C Detecting the toner density in the C Fig. 3-10 62-20
developer unit
S28 Auto-toner sensor-M Detecting the toner density in the M Fig. 3-10 62-20
developer unit
S29 Auto-toner sensor-Y Detecting the toner density in the Y Fig. 3-10 62-20
developer unit
S30 Needle electrode cleaner detection Detecting the cleaning operation for the Fig. 3-10 59-4
sensor-K needle electrode (Detecting that the
needle electrode cleaner has reached
the limit position)
S31 Needle electrode cleaner detection Detecting the cleaning operation for the Fig. 3-10 59-4
sensor-C needle electrode (Detecting that the
needle electrode cleaner has reached
the limit position)
S32 Needle electrode cleaner detection Detecting the cleaning operation for the Fig. 3-10 59-4
sensor-M needle electrode (Detecting that the
needle electrode cleaner has reached
the limit position)
S33 Needle electrode cleaner detection Detecting the cleaning operation for the Fig. 3-10 59-4
sensor-Y needle electrode (Detecting that the
needle electrode cleaner has reached
the limit position)
S34 Drum surface potential (V0) sensor-K Detecting the K drum surface potential Fig. 3-10 59-22
at charging
(e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only)
S38 Sub-hopper toner sensor-K Detecting the toner amount in the K Fig. 3-15 58-23
sub-hopper
S39 Sub-hopper toner sensor-C Detecting the toner amount in the C Fig. 3-15 58-23
sub-hopper
S40 Sub-hopper toner sensor-M Detecting the toner amount in the M Fig. 3-15 58-23
sub-hopper

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 32
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I
S41 Sub-hopper toner sensor-Y Detecting the toner amount in the Y Fig. 3-15 58-23
sub-hopper
S42 Auger lock detection sensor Detecting the auger operation in the Fig. 3-15 61-19
waste toner transport unit
S43 Color drum phase sensor Detecting the rotation phase of Y, M Fig. 3-9 56-7
and C drums
S44 K drum phase sensor Detecting the rotation phase of K drum Fig. 3-9 56-7
S46 Transfer belt contact/release detection Detecting the contact/release status of Fig. 3-12 33-2 3
sensor the transfer belt
S47 Transfer belt paper clinging detection Detecting paper clinging underneath Fig. 3-13 28-4
sensor the transfer belt
S48 Pressure roller contact/release Detecting the contact/release status of Fig. 3-7 40-36
detection sensor the fuser unit
S49 Fuser belt rotation detection sensor Detecting the rotation of the fuser belt Fig. 3-7 40-30
S50 2nd transfer roller contact/release Detecting the contact/release status of Fig. 3-13 28-4
detection sensor the 2nd transfer roller
S51 2nd transfer side paper clinging Detecting paper clinging on the 2nd Fig. 3-13 -
detection sensor transfer roller side
S52 Registration sensor Detecting paper transport at the Fig. 3-13 10-13
registration roller section
S55 Bridge unit path entrance sensor Detecting the transporting status of Fig. 3-6 23-7
paper at the entrance of the bridge unit
S56 Bridge unit path exit sensor Detecting the transporting status of Fig. 3-6 23-7
paper inside of the bridge unit
S57 Reverse path sensor Detecting the transporting status of the Fig. 3-6 20-28
reversed paper
S58 Reverse section stationary jam Detecting jams at the reverse section Fig. 3-6 25-8
detection sensor
S59 Reverse sensor Detecting the reversed paper Fig. 3-6 26-25
S60 Reverse section paper transport Detecting the transporting status of Fig. 3-6 37-16
detection sensor paper at the reverse section
S61 Upper paper exit sensor Detecting the exiting status of paper on Fig. 3-6 36-11
the upper exit tray
S62 Upper exit tray paper full detection Detecting the full status of paper exited Fig. 3-6 36-10
sensor on the upper exit tray
S63 Lower paper exit sensor Detecting the exiting status of paper on Fig. 3-6 35-11
the side exit tray
S64 Duplexing unit opening/closing Detecting the opening/closing status of Fig. 3-16 20-28
detection sensor the automatic duplexing unit
S65 Fuser transport sensor Detecting the transporting status of Fig. 3-7 22-19
paper at the fuser unit
S66 Duplexing unit path entrance sensor Detecting the transporting status of Fig. 3-16 21-45
paper at the entrance of the automatic
duplexing unit
S67 Duplexing unit path exit sensor Detecting the transporting status of Fig. 3-16 21-45
paper inside of the automatic duplexing
unit
S69 Media sensor Detecting thick paper Fig. 3-18 22-6
S70 Bypass paper size detection sensor Detecting the width of paper on the Fig. 3-18 17-14
bypass feed unit
S71 Bypass paper sensor Detecting the presence of paper on the Fig. 3-18 15-65
bypass feed unit
S72 Bypass feed sensor Detecting transported paper fed from Fig. 3-18 16-65
the bypass feed unit
S73 1st drawer detection sensor Detecting the presence of the 1st Fig. 3-20 11-7
drawer
S74 1st drawer bottom sensor Detecting the lowering status of the tray Fig. 3-19 47-7
in the 1st drawer
© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C
OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 33
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I
S75 1st drawer empty sensor Detecting the presence of the paper in Fig. 3-20 11-7
the 1st drawer
S76 1st drawer tray-up sensor Detecting the lifting status of the tray in Fig. 3-20 11-7
the 1st drawer
S77 1st drawer transport sensor Detecting the paper transport at the Fig. 3-20 11-45
paper feeding system of the 1st drawer
S78 1st drawer feed sensor Detecting the paper feeding status of Fig. 3-20 11-45
the1st drawer
S79 1st drawer paper size detection Detecting the size of paper in the 1st Fig. 3-19 46-20
sensor-1 drawer
S80 1st drawer paper size detection Detecting the size of paper in the 1st Fig. 3-19 46-20
sensor-2 drawer
S81 2nd drawer detection sensor Detecting the presence of the 2nd Fig. 3-20 11-7
drawer
S82 2nd drawer bottom sensor Detecting the lowering status of the tray Fig. 3-19 47-7
in the 2nd drawer
S83 2nd drawer empty sensor Detecting the presence of the paper in Fig. 3-20 11-7
the 2nd drawer
S84 2nd drawer tray-up sensor Detecting the lifting status of the tray in Fig. 3-20 11-7
the 2nd drawer
S85 2nd drawer transport sensor Detecting the paper transport at the Fig. 3-20 11-45
paper feeding system of the 2nd
drawer
S86 2nd drawer feed sensor Detecting the paper feeding status of Fig. 3-20 11-45
the 2nd drawer
S87 2nd drawer paper size detection Detecting the size of paper in the 2nd Fig. 3-19 46-20
sensor-1 drawer
S88 2nd drawer paper size detection Detecting the size of paper in the 2nd Fig. 3-19 46-20
sensor-2 drawer
S89 3rd drawer/tandem LCF detection Detecting the presence of the 3rd Fig. 3-20 11-7
sensor drawer or the tandem LCF
S90 3rd drawer bottom sensor Detecting the lowering status of the tray Fig. 3-19 47-7
in the 3rd drawer
S91 3rd drawer/tandem LCF empty sensor Detecting the presence of the paper in Fig. 3-20 11-7
the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF
S92 3rd drawer/tandem LCF tray-up Detecting the lifting status of the tray in Fig. 3-20 11-7
sensor the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF
S93 3rd drawer/tandem LCF transport Detecting the paper transport at the Fig. 3-20 11-45
sensor paper feeding system of the 3rd drawer
or the tandem LCF
S94 3rd drawer/tandem LCF feed sensor Detecting the paper feeding status of Fig. 3-20 11-45
the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF
S95 3rd drawer paper size detection Detecting the size of paper in the 3rd Fig. 3-19 46-20
sensor-1 drawer
S96 3rd drawer paper size detection Detecting the size of paper in the 3rd Fig. 3-19 46-20
sensor-2 drawer
S97 4th drawer detection sensor Detecting the presence of the 4th Fig. 3-20 11-7
drawer
S98 4th drawer bottom sensor Detecting the lowering status of the tray Fig. 3-19 47-7
in the 4th drawer
S99 4th drawer empty sensor Detecting the presence of the paper in Fig. 3-20 11-7
the 4th drawer
S100 4th drawer tray-up sensor Detecting the lifting status of the tray in Fig. 3-20 11-7
the 4th drawer
S101 4th drawer transport sensor Detecting the paper transport at the Fig. 3-20 11-45
paper feeding system of the 4th drawer
S102 4th drawer feed sensor Detecting the paper feeding status of Fig. 3-20 11-45
the 4th drawer

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 34
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I
S103 4th drawer paper size detection Detecting the size of paper in the 4th Fig. 3-19 46-20
sensor-1 drawer
S104 4th drawer paper size detection Detecting the size of paper in the 4th Fig. 3-19 46-20
sensor-2 drawer
S106 Standby side tray paper amount Detecting the remaining amount of Fig. 3-21 13-15
detection sensor paper on the standby side tray in the
tandem LCF
S107 Tandem LCF bottom sensor Detecting the descending status of the Fig. 3-21 14-32 3
trays in the tandem LCF
S108 Standby side tray detection sensor Detecting the presence of the standby Fig. 3-21 46-26
side tray in the tandem LCF
S109 Standby side empty sensor Detecting the presence of the paper at Fig. 3-21 13-15
the standby side of the tandem LCF
S110 Stopper opening/closing detection Detecting the opening/closing status of Fig. 3-21 14-32
sensor (front) the front stopper in the tandem LCF
S111 Stopper opening/closing detection Detecting the opening/closing status of Fig. 3-21 14-32
sensor (rear) the rear stopper in the tandem LCF
S112 End fence home position sensor Detecting the end fence home position Fig. 3-21 13-15
in the tandem LCF
S113 End fence stop position sensor Detecting the end fence stop position in Fig. 3-21 13-15
the tandem LCF
S114 Feed cover sensor Detecting the opening/closing status of Fig. 3-17 7-4
the feed cover

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 35
3.3.4 Switches

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


SWR1 Jam access cover opening/closing Switches between cutoff and supply Fig. 3-3 81-1
switch state of the 24 V power by opening/
closing of the jam access cover.
SWR2 RADF opening/closing switch Detecting the opening/closing status of Fig. 3-3 88-9
the RADF
Switches between cutoff and supply
state of the 24 V power by opening/
closing of the RADF. (RADF open:
Shutdown)

SW1 Main power switch Turning the main power of the Fig. 3-17 44-41
equipment ON/OFF
SW2 Interlock switch Supplying or shutting down the AC Fig. 3-16 44-10
power to the switching regulator (Cover
interlock system voltage generation
circuit) by opening/closing the front
cover or duplexing unit
(Cover/unit open: Shutdown)
SW3 Toner motor interlock switch Supplying or shutting down the power Fig. 3-17 44-14
to the toner motor by opening/closing
the front cover
(Cover open: Shutdown)
SW4 Duplexing unit interlock switch Supplying or shutting down the IH Fig. 3-16 46-6
power by opening/closing the duplexing
unit
(Unit open: Shutdown)
SW5 Reverse path cover switch Switching the opening/closing of the Fig. 3-6 37-13
reverse path cover
SW7 Duplexing unit cover opening/closing Detecting the opening/closing status of Fig. 3-16 18-40
detection switch the cover of the automatic duplexing
unit
SW8 Bridge unit connecting detection Detecting the connection of the bridge Fig. 3-17 44-13
switch unit
SW9 Front cover opening/closing detection Detecting the opening/closing of the Fig. 3-17 44-13
switch front cover

3.3.5 Electromagnetic spring clutches

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


CLT1 Pressure roller contact/release clutch Driving the contacting/releasing Fig. 3-7 39-7
operation of the pressure roller
CLT4 3rd drawer transport clutch Driving the transport roller of the 3rd Fig. 3-19 9-42
drawer or the tandem LCF
CLT5 3rd drawer feed clutch Driving the separation roller, feed roller Fig. 3-19 9-42
and pickup roller of the 3rd drawer or
the tandem LCF
CLT6 4th drawer transport clutch Driving the transport roller of the 4th Fig. 3-19 9-42
drawer
CLT7 4th drawer feed clutch Driving the separation roller, feed roller Fig. 3-19 9-42
and pickup roller of the 4th drawer

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 36
3.3.6 Solenoids

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


SOLR1 Original pickup solenoid Drives up and down the original pickup Fig. 3-4 89-10
roller.
SOLR2 Original reverse solenoid Drives the reverse flapper. (Switches Fig. 3-4 89-13
the flapper to the reverse side when
turned to ON.)
SOLR3 Original exit solenoid Drives the exit flapper. (Switches the Fig. 3-4 89-13 3
flapper to the original reverse tray side
when turned to ON.)

SOL1 Transport path switching solenoid-1 Driving the switching operation of the Fig. 3-6 24-28
bridge unit transport paths
SOL2 Transport path switching solenoid-2 Driving the switching operation of the Fig. 3-6 24-28
bridge unit transport paths
SOL3 Image quality shutter solenoid Driving the sensor shutter of the image Fig. 3-13 6-11
position aligning sensor (front / center /
rear) and image quality sensor
SOL4 V0 sensor shutter solenoid-K Driving the opening/closing operation Fig. 3-11 59-33
of the shutter of the drum surface
potential (V0) sensor-K
(e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only)
SOL8 Bypass pickup solenoid Driving the lifting movement of the Fig. 3-18 15-5
bypass pickup roller
SOL9 Tandem LCF solenoid Driving the lifting movement of the Fig. 3-21 11-62
tandem LCF pickup roller
SOL10 Stopper opening/closing solenoid Driving the opening/closing operation Fig. 3-21 14-28
(front) of the front stopper in the tandem LCF
SOL11 Stopper opening/closing solenoid Driving the opening/closing operation Fig. 3-21 14-28
(rear) of the rear stopper in the tandem LCF

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 37
3.3.7 PC boards

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


RADF RADF control PC board Controls the RADF. Fig. 3-4 88-23

CCD CCD driving PC board (CCD board) Scanning originals with CCD Fig. 3-5 54-15
SLG Scanning section control PC board Controlling the scanning section Fig. 3-5 54-9
(SLG board)
INV Lamp inverter board Controlling the exposure lamp Fig. 3-5 52-4
DSP Display PC board (DSP board) Controlling the whole control panel Fig. 3-26 3-32
KEY1 Key PC board-1 (KEY-1 board) Controlling the key switches and LEDs Fig. 3-26 3-31
KEY2 Key PC board-2 (KEY-2 board) Controlling the key switches and LEDs Fig. 3-26 3-30
IMG Image processing PC board Controlling the image processing Fig. 3-22 68-13
(IMG board)
SYS System control PC board (SYS board) Controlling the whole system and Fig. 3-22 68-29
image processing
LGC Logic PC board (LGC board) Controlling the print engine section Fig. 3-22 69-18
SNS H-sync detection PC board Detecting the laser beam position Fig. 3-14 48-1
(SNS board)
LDR-Y Laser driving PC board-Y Driving the Y laser diode Fig. 3-14 48-1
(LDR-Y board)
LDR-M Laser driving PC board-M Driving the M laser diode Fig. 3-14 48-1
(LDR-M board)
LDR-C Laser driving PC board-C Driving the C laser diode Fig. 3-14 48-1
(LDR-C board)
LDR-K Laser driving PC board-K Driving the K laser diode Fig. 3-14 48-1
(LDR-K board)
EPU EPU PC board (EPU board) Storing information of the developer Fig. 3-11 61-24
unit (EPU)
V0S Drum surface potential sensors control Controlling the drum surface potential Fig. 3-11 61-25
PC board (V0S board) (V0) sensors
PFC Paper feeding control PC board (PFC Controlling paper feeding Fig. 3-22 69-23
board)
ADU ADU control PC board (ADU board) Controlling the automatic duplexing unit Fig. 3-16 18-35
DRV DRV PC board Controlling bypass unit, transfer belt Fig. 3-6 46-35
unit and paper exiting
IH Heater control PC board Controlling the IH coil of the fuser unit Fig. 3-8 38-34
(IH board)
FIL Filter PC board (FIL board) • Filtering out the AC power noise Fig. 3-22 70-6
• Power supplying to each damp
heater
RAM-S SRAM board <for SYS board> Storing the setting or adjustment value, Fig. 3-22 68-30
etc. used for the control by the system
control PC board
RAM-L SRAM board <for LGC board> Storing the setting or adjustment value, Fig. 3-22 69-20
etc. used for the control by the logic PC
board

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 38
3.3.8 Lamps, coils, and heaters

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


EXP Exposure lamp Exposing originals Fig. 3-5 52-9
ERS-K Discharge LED-K Eliminating residual charge on the K Fig. 3-11 64-20
drum surface
ERS-C Discharge LED-C Eliminating residual charge on the C Fig. 3-11 64-20
drum surface
ERS-M Discharge LED-M Eliminating residual charge on the M Fig. 3-11 64-20
3
drum surface
ERS-Y Discharge LED-Y Eliminating residual charge on the Y Fig. 3-11 64-20
drum surface
LED Fuser unit jam releasing LED Illuminating the exit roller section of the Fig. 3-16 44-55
fuser unit for releasing paper jams
LAMP Pressure roller heater lamp Heating of the pressure roller Fig. 3-8 42-30
• Center heater lamp
• Side heater lamp
• Sub heater lamp
(for e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C
MJC, MJD)
IH-COIL IH coil Heating of the fuser belt Fig. 3-8 43-13
DH1 Scanner damp heater (Left) Preventing condensation of the mirrors Fig. 3-25 -
of the carriage
DH2 Scanner damp heater (Right) Preventing condensation of the lens Fig. 3-25 54-34
DH3 Drum damp heater Preventing condensation of the drum Fig. 3-25 5-20

3.3.9 Thermistors, thermopiles, and thermostats

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


THM1 Drum thermistor-K Detecting the surface temperature of Fig. 3-10 59-27
the drum for K
THM2 Drum thermistor-Y Detecting the surface temperature of Fig. 3-10 59-27
the drum for Y
THM3 Pressure roller center thermistor Detecting the surface temperature of Fig. 3-7 42-15
the center of the pressure roller
THM4 Pressure roller side thermistor Detecting the surface temperature of Fig. 3-7 42-15
the side of the pressure roller
THM5 Pressure roller edge thermistor Detecting the surface temperature of Fig. 3-7 42-15
the front edge of the pressure roller
THM6 Fuser belt edge thermistor Detecting the surface temperature of Fig. 3-7 40-23
the front edge of the fuser belt
THMP1 Fuser belt thermopile Detecting the surface temperature of Fig. 3-7 38-2
the fuser belt
THMO1 Scanner damp heater thermostat Controlling the temperature of the Fig. 3-25 -
scanner damp heater
THMO2 Pressure roller center thermostat Controlling the temperature of the Fig. 3-7 42-16
center of the pressure roller
THMO3 Pressure roller side thermostat Controlling the temperature of the side Fig. 3-7 42-17
of the pressure roller
THMO4 Fuser belt thermostat Controlling the temperature of the Fig. 3-7 43-42
Fuser belt

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 39
3.3.10 Transformer

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


HVT1 PS-HVT1 Generating high-voltage and supplying Fig. 3-23 70-1
High-voltage transformer-1 it to the following sections
• Main charger needle electrode
• Main charger grid
• Developer bias
HVT2 PS-HVT2 Generating high-voltage and supplying Fig. 3-23 70-4
High-voltage transformer-2 it to the following sections
• 1st transfer bias
• 2nd transfer bias

3.3.11 Others

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


TCP TCP Displaying and entering various kinds Fig. 3-26 3-23
Touch panel of information
HDD HDD Saving program data and image data Fig. 3-22 68-24
Hard disk
PS PS-ACC Generating DC voltage and supplying it Fig. 3-23 70-26
Switching regulator to each section of the equipment
BRK BRK Preventing overcurrent to the Fig. 3-23 70-7
Breaker equipment

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 40
3.4 Copy Process
2
8
Original exposure
Fusing
Xenon lamp Paper exit
IH coil Heater lamp

3
6 1st transfer
Data reading (scanning) 3
CCD

7
2nd transfer

Image processing
Toner
Carrier
5
Photocon-
Black development ductive drum 9
Magnetic roller bias Cleaning

(-) Discharging (LED array)


10
4
Bypass feeding
Data writing
1 Drawer feeding
Semiconductor laser
Charger (grid voltage) LCF / Tandem LCF feeding
Fig. 3-27

(1) Charging: Places a negative charge on the (6) 1st transfer: Transfers the visible image
surface of the photoconductive drum. (toner) on photoconductive drum to the
transfer belt.
 
(2) Original exposure: Converts images on the (7) 2nd transfer: Transfers the visible image
original into optical signals. (toner) on the transfer belt to paper.
 
(3) Data reading: The optical image signals are (8) Fusing: Fuses the toner image to the paper
read into CCD and converted into electrical by applying heat and pressure.
signals.
 
(4) Data writing: The electrical image signals (9) Blade cleaning: While scraping off the
are changed to light signals (by laser residual toner from the drum by the blade.
emission) which expose the surface of the
photoconductive drum.
 
(5) Development: Negatively-charged toner is (10) (–) Discharging: Eliminates the residual (–)
made to adhere to the photoconductive charge from the surface of the
drum, producing a visible image. photoconductive drum.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 41
3.5 Comparison with e-STUDIO5520C/6520C/6530C

Process e-STUDIO5520C/6520C/6530C e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C


1. Drum OD-FC55 (OPC drum) 
Photoconductive Sensitivity Highly sensitized drum (ø60) 
drum
2. Charging Scorotron type 
-250 to -1200 V (grid voltage)
(adjusting by image quality
control)
(feedback control with the surface (Feedback control with the surface
potential sensor) potential sensor only for K station in e-
STUDIO6550C)
3. Data writing Light source Semiconductor laser 
Light 3.25 nJ/mm2 
amount
4. Image control Image quality control by detecting 
toner adhesion amount
5. Development Magnetic One magnetic roller 
roller
Auto-toner Magnetic bridge-circuit method 
detection
Toner supply Toner cartridge replacing method 
Toner-empty Density detection method 
detection
Cartridge- Sub-hopper toner remaining 
empty amount detection method
detection
Toner NAC/NAD T-FC55-K, T-FC55-Y NAC/NAD T-FC65-K, T-FC65-Y
T-FC55-M, T-FC55-C T-FC65-M, T-FC65-C
MJC/MJD T-FC55-EK, T-FC55-EY MJC/MJD T-FC65-EK, T-FC65-EY
T-FC55-EM, T-FC55-EC T-FC65-EM, T-FC65-EC
CND T-FC55-CK, T-FC55-CY CND T-FC65-CK, T-FC65-CY
T-FC55-CM, T-FC55-CC T-FC65-CM, T-FC65-CC
Others T-FC55-DK, T-FC55-DY Others T-FC65-DK, T-FC65-DY
T-FC55-DM, T-FC55-DC T-FC65-DM, T-FC65-DC
(K: Black, Y: Yellow, M: Magenta, C: (K: Black, Y: Yellow, M: Magenta, C:
Cyan) Cyan)
Developer D-FC55-K (black) 
material D-FC55-Y (yellow)
D-FC55-M (magenta)
D-FC55-C (cyan)
Developer DC -100 to -900V (adjusting by 
bias image quality control)
AC 1000 V / 8 to 13kHz
6. Transfer 1st transfer Transfer belt method 
2nd transfer: Transfer roller method 
7. Separation Self-separation by transfer belt and 
2nd transfer roller
8. Method Blade cleaning 
Photoconductive Recovered Non-reusable 
drum cleaning toner
9. Transfer belt cleaning Blade cleaning 
10.Discharge LED array (red) 

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 42
Process e-STUDIO5520C/6520C/6530C e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C
11.Fusing Method External heating STF fusing system External IH heating fusing and heat
pipe roller soaking systems
Fuser roller Satellite roller: Heat pipe roller:
side Aluminum roller (ø17) Roller in which a heat pipe is
embedded (ø17.4)
Fuser roller: 
Sponge roller (ø48.5)
Fuser belt:  3
PFA tube belt (ø60)
IH coil: 2 coils IH coil: 1 coil
• 200 to 1240W (for MJC/ • 200 to 1240W (for MJC/MJD)
MJD) • 200 to 1100W (for NAC/NAD,
• 200 to 1100W (for NAC/ ASU, ASD, ARD, AUC/AUD,
NAD, ASU, ASD, ARD, CND)
AUC/AUD, CND)
Pressure Pressure roller: 
roller side Silicon rubber roller,
(Surface-PFA tube)(ø50)
Heater lamp:
• 300 W x 2 (for NAC/NAD)
• 300 W x 2 + 800 W x 1 (for
MJC/MJD)
• 300 W x 2 (for ASU, ASD,
ARD, AUC/AUD, CND)
Cleaning None 
Heater ON/OFF control and power control 
temperature by thermopile/thermistor
Heater IH coil + Heater lamp 

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 43
3.6 Comparison with e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C

Process e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C


1. Drum OD-FC55 (OPC drum) 
Photoconductive Sensitivity Highly sensitized drum (ø60) 
drum
2. Charging Scorotron type 
-250 to -1200 V (grid voltage)
(adjusting by image quality control)
(Feedback control with the surface (adjusting by image quality control)
potential sensor only for K station in e- (Feedback control with the surface
STUDIO6550C) potential sensor only for K station in
e-STUDIO6570C)
3. Data writing Light source Semiconductor laser 
Light 3.25 nJ/mm2 
amount
4. Image control Image quality control by detecting toner 
adhesion amount
5. Development Magnetic One magnetic roller 
roller
Auto-toner Magnetic bridge-circuit method 
detection
Toner supply Toner cartridge replacing method 
Toner-empty Density detection method 
detection
Cartridge- Sub-hopper toner remaining amount 
empty detection method
detection
Toner NAC/NAD T-FC65-K, T-FC65-Y NAC/NAD PS-ZTFC75UK
T-FC65-M, T-FC65-C PS-ZTFC75UY
MJC/MJD T-FC65-EK, T-FC65-EY PS-ZTFC75UM
T-FC65-EM, T-FC65-EC PS-ZTFC75UC
CND T-FC65-CK, T-FC65-CY MJC/MJD PS-ZTFC75EK
T-FC65-CM, T-FC65-CC PS-ZTFC75EY
Others T-FC65-DK, T-FC65-DY PS-ZTFC75EM
T-FC65-DM, T-FC65-DC PS-ZTFC75EC
(K: Black, Y: Yellow, M: Magenta, C: AUD PS-ZTFC75DK
Cyan) PS-ZTFC75DY
PS-ZTFC75DM
PS-ZTFC75DC
ARD PS-ZTFC75AK
PS-ZTFC75AY
PS-ZTFC75AM
PS-ZTFC75AC
CND PS-ZTFC65CK
PS-ZTFC65CY
PS-ZTFC65CM
PS-ZTFC65CC
Others PS-ZTFC75PK
PS-ZTFC75PY
PS-ZTFC75PM
PS-ZTFC75PC
(K: Black, Y: Yellow, M: Magenta, C:
Cyan)
Developer D-FC55-K (black) D-FC65-K (black)
material D-FC55-Y (yellow) D-FC65-Y (yellow)
D-FC55-M (magenta) D-FC65-M (magenta)
D-FC55-C (cyan) D-FC65-C (cyan)
Developer DC -100 to -900V (adjusting by image 
bias quality control)
AC 1000 V / 8 to 13kHz
6. Transfer 1st transfer Transfer belt method 
2nd transfer: Transfer roller method 

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 44
Process e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
7. Separation Self-separation by transfer belt and 2nd 
transfer roller
8. Method Blade cleaning 
Photoconductive Recovered Non-reusable 
drum cleaning toner
9. Transfer belt cleaning Blade cleaning 
10.Discharge LED array (red) 
11.Fusing Method External IH heating fusing and heat  3
pipe roller soaking systems
Fuser roller Heat pipe roller: 
side Roller in which a heat pipe is
embedded (ø17.4)
Fuser roller: 
Sponge roller (ø48.5)
Fuser belt: 
PFA tube belt (ø60)
IH coil: 1 coil 
• 200 to 1240W (for MJC/MJD)
• 200 to 1100W (for NAC/NAD,
ASU, ASD, ARD, AUC/AUD,
CND)
Pressure Pressure roller: Pressure roller:
roller side Silicon rubber roller, Silicon rubber roller,
(Surface-PFA tube)(ø50) (Surface-PFA tube)(ø50)
Heater lamp: Heater lamp:
• 300 W x 2 (for NAC/NAD) • 300 W x 2
• 300 W x 2 + 800 W x 1 (for
MJC/MJD)
• 300 W x 2 (for ASU, ASD, ARD,
AUC/AUD, CND)
Cleaning None 
Heater ON/OFF control and power control by 
temperature thermopile/thermistor
Heater IH coil + Heater lamp 

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 45
3.7 General Operation

3.7.1 Overview of Operation


Operation of equipment Operation during initializing, pre-running and ready
Drawer feed copying by the [START] button
Copying operation Bypass feed copying
Interrupt copying

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 46
3.7.2 Description of Operation

[ 1 ] Warming-up
1. Initialization
 Power ON
 IH coils (IH-COIL) / Heater lamps (LAMP) ON
 The set number “1”, reproduction ratio “100%” and “Wait Warming Up” are displayed.
 Fan motors ON
 Initialization of laser optical system 3
- The polygonal motor (M34) rotates at high speed.
 Initialization of feeding system
- Each drawer tray goes up.
- Tandem LCF tray goes up.
 The pre-running operation is stopped after five seconds.
 Initialization of process unit system (process unit related section)
- The 2nd transfer roller moves to the releasing position.
- The transfer belt moves to the releasing position.
- The needle electrode cleaner moves to the home position.
 Drum phasing
- The drum motor (M27, M28) is turned ON.
- The transfer belt motor (M13) is turned ON.
 Cleaning of transfer belt
- (Performs color registration control.)*1
- (Performs drum surface potential sensors control. (e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only))*1
- (Performs image quality control.)*1
 Initialization of scanning system
- The carriage moves to the home position.
- The carriage moves to the peak detection position.
- The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned ON.
- Peak detection (the white color is detected by the shading correction plate)
- The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned OFF.
 The polygonal motor (M34) rotates at low speed.
 “READY (WARMING UP)” is displayed.

2. Pre-running operation
The pre-running operation is started at the corresponding starting timing or when the temperature of
the pressure roller surface becomes pre-running.
 The fuser motor (M6) is turned ON.
- Fuser roller rotation.

3. When the temperature of the fuser belt and pressure roller surfaces becomes sufficient for fusing,
 The IH coil (IH-COIL) / Heater lamps (LAMP) is turned OFF.
 “READY” is displayed.
 The polygonal motor (M34) rotates at high speed for 30 seconds.

*1: Image quality control and color registration control should be performed only at a change of
environment or at periodical maintenance.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 47
[ 2 ] Ready (ready for copying)
 Buttons on the control panel enabled
 When no button is pressed for a certain period of time,
- The set number “1” and reproduction ratio “100%” are displayed. The equipment returns to
the normal ready state.
 The fuser unit repeats rotation and stopping

[ 3 ] Drawer feed copying (1st drawer paper feeding)


1. Press the [START] button.
 “READY” changes to “COPYING”.
 The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned ON
 The scan motor (M1) is turned ON.  Carriages-1 and -2 move forward.
 The polygonal motor (M34) rotates at high speed.
 The drum motor (M27, M28), transport motor (M40, M41), transfer belt motor (M13), 2nd transfer
cam motor (M48), developer unit motor (M29, M31), developer unit mixer motor (M30, M32),
fuser motor (M6) and exit motor (M2) are turned ON.
- The drum, transfer belt, fuser unit, developer unit and exit roller are driven.

2. Drawer paper feeding


 The fans are rotated at high speed and feed motor (M42) is turned ON.
- The pickup roller, feed roller, separation roller and transport roller start to rotate.
 Paper reaches the 1st drawer feed sensor (S78).
- The 1st drawer feed sensor (S78) is turned ON.
 Paper reaches the registration roller
- The registration sensor (S52) is turned ON and aligning is performed.
 The feed motor (M42) is turned OFF after a certain period of time.

3. After a certain period of time passed from the carriage operation


 The registration motor (M39) is turned ON after a certain period of time.  Paper is transported to
the transfer area.
 The copy counter operates.

4. Completion of scanning
 The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned OFF.
 The Scan motor (M1) is turned OFF.
 The Registration motor (M39) is turned OFF (after the trailing edge of the paper passed the
registration roller).
 “READY (PRINTING)” is displayed.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 48
5. Printing operation
1) Color printing operation
 The drum motor (M27, M28), transfer belt motor (M13) and discharge
LED-Y, -M, -C, -K (ERS) ON.
 The 2nd transfer cam motor (M48) is turned ON.
- The 2nd transfer roller contacts with the transfer belt. The motor is turned OFF after this.
 The 2nd transfer bias is turned ON.
 The main charger bias is turned ON.
 The transfer belt cam motor (M14) is turned ON. 3
- The 1st transfer rollers (Y, M and C) contact the transfer belt.
 The YMCK developer bias (DC), developer unit motor (M29, M31) and developer unit mixer
motor (M30, M32) are turned ON.
 The YMC and K developer bias (AC) are turned ON.
 Laser emission (yellow image)
 The 1st transfer bias (Y) is turned ON.
- 1st transfer of yellow image (The yellow image is transferred to the transfer belt.)
 The 1st transfer bias (Y) is turned OFF.
 Laser emission (magenta image)
 The 1st transfer bias (M) is turned ON.
- 1st transfer of magenta image (The magenta image is transferred to the transfer belt.)
 The 1st transfer bias (M) is turned OFF.
 Laser emission (cyan image)
 The 1st transfer bias (C) is turned ON.
- 1st transfer of cyan image (The cyan image is transferred to the transfer belt.)
 The 1st transfer bias (C) is turned OFF.
 Laser emission (black image)
 The 1st transfer bias (K) is turned ON.
- 1st transfer of black image (The black image is transferred to the transfer belt.)
 The 1st transfer bias (K) is turned OFF.
 The transfer belt cam motor (M14) is turned OFF.
- The 1st transfer rollers (Y, M and C) are released from the transfer belt.
 2nd transfer of YMCK image (The YMCK image on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper.)
 The main charger is turned OFF.
 The developer unit motor (M29, M31), developer unit mixer motor (M30, M32) and developer
bias (YMC and K) are turned OFF.
 Drum phasing
 The drum motor (M27, M28), transfer belt motor (M13) and discharge
LED-Y, -M, -C, -K (ERS) OFF.
 The 2nd transfer cam motor (M48) is turned ON.
- The 2nd transfer roller is released from the transfer belt. The motor is turned OFF after this.
 The 2nd transfer bias is turned OFF.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 49
2) Black printing operation
 The drum motor (M27), transfer belt motor (M13), 2nd transfer motor (M9) and discharge LED-K
(ERS) ON.
 The 2nd transfer cam motor (M48) is turned ON.
- The 2nd transfer roller contacts with the transfer belt. The motor is turned OFF after this.
 The 2nd transfer bias is turned ON.
 The main charger bias is turned ON.
 The K developer bias (DC), developer unit motor (M29) and developer unit mixer motor (M30)
are turned ON.
 The K developer bias (AC) is turned ON.
 Laser emission (black image)
 The 1st transfer bias (K) is turned ON.
- 1st transfer of black image (The black image is transferred to the transfer belt.)
 The 1st transfer bias (K) is turned OFF.
 2nd transfer of K image (The K image on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper.)
 The main charger is turned OFF.
 The developer unit motor (M29), developer unit mixer motor (M30) and developer bias (K) are
turned OFF.
 Drum phasing
 The Drum motor (M27), transfer belt motor (M13) and discharge LED-K
(ERS) OFF.
 The 2nd transfer cam motor (M48) is turned ON.
- The 2nd transfer roller is released from the transfer belt. The motor is turned OFF after this.
 The 2nd transfer bias is turned OFF.

6. Paper exiting
 The exit sensor (S61, S63) detects the trailing edge of the paper.
 The toner recovery auger and discharge LED (ERS) OFF.
 The drum motor (M27, M28), developer unit mixer motor (M30, M32), transfer belt motor (M13),
2nd transfer motor (M9), transport motor (M40, 41), developer unit motor (M29, M31), fuser
motor (M6) and exit motor (M2) are turned OFF.
 The polygonal motor (M4) rotates at low speed.
 The drum, fuser unit and developer unit are stopped.
- The fans return to rotate at the normal rotation speed.
 “READY” is displayed and the equipment enters into the ready mode.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 50
[ 4 ] Bypass feed copying
1. Place paper on the bypass tray.
 The bypass paper sensor (S71) is turned ON.
- “Ready for bypass feeding” is displayed.
 The carriages move to their home position.

2. Press the [START] button.


 “Ready for bypass feeding” changes to “COPYING”.
 Exposure lamp (EXP) ON 3
 Scan motor (M1) ON  Carriages-1 and -2 move forward.
 The drum motor (M27, M28), transfer belt motor (M13), 2nd transfer motor (M9), transport motor
(M40, 41), developer unit motor (M29, M31), developer unit mixer motor (M30, M32), fuser motor
(M6) and exit motor (M2) are turned ON.
- The drum, transfer belt, fuser unit, developer unit and exit roller are driven.

3. Bypass feeding
 The fans rotate at high speed.
 The bypass motor (M12) is turned ON.
- The bypass pickup roller is lowered.
 The bypass pickup solenoid (SOL8) is turned ON.
- The bypass pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller start to rotate.
 Aligning operation
 Paper reaches the registration roller.
 After a certain period of time, the bypass motor (M12) is turned OFF.

4. Hereafter, operations (3) through (6) of “[ 3 ]Drawer feed copying (1st drawer paper feeding)” are
repeated.

[ 5 ] Interruption copying
1. Press the [INTERRUPT] button
 LED “INTERRUPT” is turned ON.
 Copying operation in progress is temporarily stopped, and the carriages-1 and -2 return to their
appropriate positions.
 “Job interrupted job 1 saved” is displayed.
 Automatic density and reproduction ratio 100% are set. The set number remains the same.

2. Select the desired copy condition

3. After interruption copying is finished:


 “Press interrupt to resume job 1” is displayed.
 LED “INTERRUPT” is turned OFF by pressing the [INTERRUPT] button, and the equipment
returns to the status before the interruption.
 “Ready to resume job 1” is displayed.

4. Press the [START] button


The copying operation before the interruption is resumed.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 51
3.7.3 Detection of Abnormality
When something abnormal has occurred in the equipment, symbols corresponding to the type of
abnormality are displayed.

[ 1 ] Types of abnormality
1. Abnormalities cleared without turning OFF the door switch
(A) Add paper
(B) Paper misfeed in bypass
(C) No toner in the cartridge

2. Abnormalities not cleared without turning OFF the door switch


(D) Misfeed in equipment
(E) Waste toner box replacement

3. Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the main power switch
(F) Call for service

[ 2 ] Description of abnormality

[A] Add paper

• [In case of the equipment drawer or PFP drawer] (When no drawer is installed)
Drawer not detected

Drawer is not installed:
Drawer is installed but there is no paper in it:

No paper

A signal sent to the control circuit

Drawer area of the control panel blinks
(When the drawer is selected)

[START] button is disabled.
[In case of the equipment, tandem LCF] (When a drawer is installed)
Based on the combination of the tray-up motor (M44, M45) movement and the status of the tray-up
sensor and empty sensor, The CPU detects the presence of paper.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 52
• When the power is turned ON or tandem LCF drawer is inserted (When the power is turned ON or
The equipment drawers are inserted).
LCF performs initialization.

Detects the presence of paper
Tray-up motor ON - The tray goes up

3
At this time, the tray-up sensor and LCF empty sensor are OFF.
 When the tray-up sensor is not turned ON within a fixed period of time, it means
that the tray is in an abnormal condition
“Add paper” is displayed regardless of the presence/absence of paper.
 Cleared by turning the power ON/OFF

 The tray-up sensor is turned ON within a fixed period of time


- The tray-up motor stops.
At this time, if the empty sensor is ON: It is judged that there is paper.
OFF: It is judged that there is no paper.

The drawer area of the control
panel blinks.
(When the drawer is selected)

• When the paper in the drawer runs short during copying,


 The tray-up sensor is turned OFF.
 The tray-up motor is turned ON. - The tray goes up.
 The tray-up sensor is turned ON.
 The tray-up motor is stopped.

• The empty sensor is turned OFF during copying in spite of the tray-up sensor being ON

It is judged that there is no paper.

The drawer area of the control panel blinks.
(When the drawer is selected)

The copying operation is stopped.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 53
[B] Paper misfeed in bypass

• [In case of the equipment drawer or PFP drawer] (When no drawer is installed)
• During bypass feeding
The bypass motor (M12) is turned ON

The registration sensor (S52) is turned ON
* The registration sensor (S52) is not turned ON within a fixed period of time (E120).

Bypass misfeeding

The bypass misfeed symbol is displayed.

The copying operation is disabled.

Solution: The bypass sensor (S71) is turned OFF when you remove the paper from the bypass
tray.

[C] No toner in the cartridge

• Toner density becomes low


Auto-toner sensor (S26, S27, S28, S29) detects the absence of toner

Fixed time toner supplying: Sub-hopper toner motor (M19, M20, M21, M22) ON

Not reaching the specified toner density: Auto toner sensor (S26, S27, S28, S29)

Control circuitToner cartridge replacement display:
Color copying is not accepted if the Y/M/C toner cartridge replacement display
appears.(Black copying is accepted.)
Copying is not accepted if the toner K cartridge replacement display appears.
Solution: Replace the toner cartridge with new one.
Toner is supplied  copying operation enabled

• Sub-hopper toner remaining amount decreased


Sub-hopper toner remaining amount decreasing detection: Sub-hopper toner sensor (S38, S39,
S40, S41)

Toner supplying for a specified time: Toner motor (M15, M16, M17, M18) and sub-hopper toner
motor (M19, M20, M21, M22) ON

Sub-hopper toner sensor (S38, S39, S40, S41) does not detect “full”.

Control circuitToner cartridge empty display:
The auto toner sensor detects that the density is not reached and color/black
copies can be made until the toner cartridge empty status is determined
Solution: Replace the toner cartridge with new one.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 54
[D] Misfeed in equipment

• The exit sensor (S61, S63) detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper.

The registration motor (M39) is turned ON
ON
 Regulation time Registration motor
Exit sensor (S61, S63) turned ON ON
If the exit sensor (S61, S63) is not turned ON Exit sensor 3
after a regulation time,
 Timer
Paper jam (E010) The copying operation is 0 Regulation time
stopped.
Paper jam (E010)
Fig. 3-28

• The exit sensor (S61, S63) detects jamming of the trailing edge of the paper.
The registration motor (M39) is turned OFF Registration motor
OFF
 Regulation time.
The exit sensor (S61, S63) turned OFF Exit sensor
If the exit sensor (S61, S63) is not turned OFF ON
a regulation time,

Timer
Paper jam (E020) The copying operation is Regulation time
stopped.

Paper jam (E020)


Fig. 3-29

• The 2nd transfer side paper clinging detection sensor (S51) detects jamming of the paper.
The registration motor (M39) is turned ON
The transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor (S47) is turned ON

If the 2nd transfer side paper clinging detection sensor (S51) is not turned ON in a fixed period of
time,

Paper jam (E011) The copying operation is stopped.

• Immediately after the power is turned ON



Any of the sensors on the paper transport path detects paper (ON).

Paper jam (E030)

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 55
• The registration sensor (S52) detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper:
The registration sensor (S52) is not turned ON within a fixed period of time after the leading edge
of the paper passed the transport roller.

Paper jam (E120, E200, E210, E300, E330 and E3C0)
• During paper feeding from the ADU:
The registration sensor (S52) is not turned ON within a fixed period of time after the ADU motor
(M7, 8) is turned ON.

Paper jam (E110)

• During paper transporting from the ADU:


The duplexing unit path sensor (S66, S67) do not detect the paper at the fixed timing.

Paper jam (E510 and E520)

• During paper feeding from the equipment or the PFP:


The registration sensor (S52) is not turned ON within a fixed period of time after the feed clutch is
turned ON.

Paper jam (E220, E310, E320, E340 to E360, E3D0 and E3E0: The error code differs depending
on the paper source.)

[E] Waste toner box replacement

• The waste toner box is full of used toner



Waste toner box full detection sensor (S14) ON

“Dispose of used toner” is displayed

• The waste toner box full detection sensor (S14) is turned ON during printing

Printing is stopped after the paper being printed has exited
Solution: Replace the waste toner box with a new one and close the waste toner box cover.

[F] Call for service


Check the error code displayed on the control panel when “Call for service” appears, and deal with
the abnormality referring to the error code table.
P. 8-6"8.2 Error Code List"

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 56
3.7.4 Hibernation function
A hibernation function is embedded in this equipment. This function allows the equipment to store the
last status of the system in the HDD immediately before the power is turned OFF, and to restart from
this stored status at the next boot-up. The equipment starts up in the specified time described in the
warmup time after the execution of the 2nd hibernation when the power is turned OFF and then back
ON correctly. *
For warming-up time, refer to P. 2-1"2.1.1 General"

It is recommended to shut down the equipment while pressing the [ACCESS] button and the [POWER] 3
button simultaneously before maintenance. However, warming-up takes longer when the equipment
boots up next time since no hibernation is executed. The equipment therefore boots up in the
initialization status. “Checking” is displayed on the LCD screen when the equipment boots up normally
(without hibernation), and “Checking” is not displayed when hibernation is executed.

If hibernation is not performed when the power is turned OFF or the equipment boots up immediately
after the settings, warming-up takes longer. It differs depending on the usage conditions; warming-up
will take approx. 30 to 150 sec, though it takes approx. 20 sec. if hibernation is performed (normal
situation).

The following are the conditions which necessitate a longer warming-up time.
• Rebooting from TopAccess
• First booting after power interruption
• First booting after a self-diagnosis code is changed in the Service UI
• First booting after the power is turned OFF with the main power switch during the super sleep mode
• Installing options or finishers
• First booting after an option or a finisher is removed
• During toner supply
• Operating while “READY (WARMING UP)” is still on the control panel
• First booting after the [ACCESS] and [POWER] buttons are pressed and held until the power is shut
down
• Shutting down during network initialization
• First booting after the power is turned OFF in a procedure other than the correct one described in
the Quick Start Guide

* How to turn the power OFF correctly


Press the [POWER] button on the control panel to shut down the equipment. Be sure to check that the
ON/OFF lamp (green) has stopped blinking and the touch panel screen and the lamp (green) have
gone off. Then turn the power OFF with the main power switch.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 57
3.8 Control Panel

3.8.1 General Description


The control panel consists of button switches and touch-panel switches to operate the equipment and
select various modes, and LEDs and an LCD to display the state of the equipment or the messages.
When the operator’s attention is required, graphic symbols light or blink with messages explaining the
condition of the equipment in the LCD panel. When paper jams and “Call for service” occur, error codes
are also displayed to notify users of the problem.
A color LCD is used in this equipment so that visibility and operability are improved.
This equipment has an LCD larger than those of our existing models and an arm to attach the control
panel. This arm enabled the height adjustment and the angular adjustment in both vertical and
horizontal directions of the control panel so visibility and operability of the control panel has been
greatly improved.
And the [ON/OFF] button is placed on the control panel of this equipment. Use this button instead of the
main power switch to turn ON/OFF the power.
Press the [ON/OFF] button for 1 second or more to turn ON/OFF the power of the equipment.
Also, the [ON/OFF] button can be used in the following manner for example: press the [ON/OFF] button
while holding down the [0] and [5] buttons simultaneously to activate the Adjustment Mode (05).
However, if the equipment is in the super sleep mode, use the main power switch.

Control Panel: e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C

Fig. 3-30

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 58
Control Panel: e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C

Fig. 3-31

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 59
3.8.2 Description of Operation

[ 1 ] Dot matrix LCD circuit


1. Structure

800 x R,G,B x 600 dots

Fig. 3-32

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 60
3.9 Scanner

3.9.1 General Description


In the scanning section of this equipment, the surface of an original is irradiated with a direct light and
the reflected light is led through mirrors, a lens and a slit to CCD where optical-to-electrical conversion
is performed, converting the optical image data into an electrical (analog) signal. This analog signal is
changed to a digital signal, which then undertakes various corrective processes necessary for image
formation. After that, arithmetic operation is performed on the digital signal, which is then transmitted to 3
the data writing section.
The color high-speed-drive CCD sensor is used in the equipment to make high-speed-drive and high-
resolution for scanning originals possible.

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

[8] [8] [8] [9] [10] [11]

Fig. 3-33

[1] RADF original glass


[2] Carriage-2
[3] Exposure lamp
[4] Reflector
[5] Carriage-1
[6] Original glass
[7] Drive pulley
[8] Automatic original detection sensor
[9] Lens
[10] CCD board
[11] SLG board

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 61
3.9.2 Construction

Scanner
Original glass Original glass
RADF original glass
Carriage-1 Exposure lamp (EXP) Xenon lamp (35W)
Inverter board (INV)
Reflector
Mirror-1
Carriage-2 Mirror-2
Mirror-3
Lens unit
CCD driving PC
board (CCD)
Automatic original
detection sensor
(S1-5)
Driving section Scan motor (M1) • 2-phase stepping motor
• Wire drive
• Driving the carriage-1 and carriage-2
Other Scanning section control PC board (SLG)
Carriage home position sensor (S6)
Platen sensor (S7)
Rubber damper
SLG board cooling fan (F1)
Exposure lamp cooling fan-1 (F2)
Scanner unit cooling fan-1 (F3)
Exposure lamp cooling fan-2 (F26)

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 62
3.9.3 Functions
The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system:

1. CCD driving PC board (CCD)


Processes such as signal amplification, signal integration and A/D conversion are applied on the
electrical signal which was converted by CCD.

Lens unit CCD driving PC board


3

Fig. 3-34

2. Scanning section control PC board (SLG)


This is a board to perform the image correction, such as the shading correction and 3-line
correction, and control the scan motor (M1) and exposure lamp (EXP).

3. Automatic original detection sensor (S1-5)


The size of an original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the automatic original
detection sensors (S1-5) fixed on the base frame without moving the carriage-1.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 63
3.9.4 Description of Operation

[ 1 ] Scanning operation
Wire pulley
Scan motor Carriage-1

Motor speed-reduction pulley Carriage-2


Motor pulley Idler pulley
Fig. 3-35

• Scanning of an original placed on the original glass


This motor drives the carriages-1 and -2 through the timing belt and carriage wire. First, the scan
motor drives the carriages-1 and -2 to their respective home positions. The home positions are
detected when the carriage-1 passes the home position sensor (S6). When the [START] button is
pressed, the both carriages start to move and scan the original on the glass.

• Scanning of an original placed on the RADF


The carriage-1 stays at the shading position during shading correction, and at the scanning
position during scanning operation.

• Carriage speed
The carriage speed of the original placed on the original glass in the color mode is the same as
that in the black mode.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 64
3.9.5 Principle of original size detection
Reflection type photosensors are placed on the base frame of the scanner unit as shown in the figure
below. Each sensor consists of an infrared Light Emitting Diode (LED) on the light emitting side, and a
phototransistor on the light receiving side.
When there is an original on the original glass, light beams from the LEDs are reflected by the original
and led to the phototransistors. This means that the presence of the original is detected by the
presence of reflection (when scanning black image).
1. Sensor detection points
[A4 Series] 3

A5 B5 A4
APS-R

APS-3

A5–R

B5–R

APS-C A4–R

APS-2 B4

APS-1
A3
Fig. 3-36

[LT Series]

ST LT
APS-R

APS-3

ST–R

APS-C
LT–R LG

APS-2

LD
Fig. 3-37

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 65
3.10 Laser Optical Unit

3.10.1 General Description


The laser optical unit radiates the laser beam onto the photoconductive drum responding to the digital
image signals transmitted from the scanner, USB, network, etc. to create the latent image. The image
signal is converted into the light emission signal of the laser diode on the laser driving PC board (LDR),
then radiated on the drum through the optical elements such as polygonal mirror (polygonal motor) and
lens.The unit must not be disassembled in the field as they are very sensitive to dust and finely
adjusted at the factory.

[1]

[10]

[2] [9]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[4]
[5]

Fig. 3-38

[1] Shutter
[2] Shutter sensor (end position)
[3] Shutter sensor (home position)
[4] Shutter motor
[5] Laser optical unit
[6] Slit glass-Y
[7] Slit glass-M
[8] Slit glass-C
[9] Slit glass-K
[10] Polygonal motor

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 66
3.10.2 Laser precautions
- Laser precautions
A laser diode is used for this equipment and radiates an invisible laser beam.
Since it is not visible, be extremely careful when handling the laser optical unit components,
performing operations or adjusting the laser beam. Also never perform the procedure with other
than the specified manuals because you could be exposed to the laser radiation.
The laser optical unit is completely sealed with a protective cover. As long as only the operations
of specified manuals are performed, the laser beam is not leaked and you are in no danger of
being exposed to laser radiation. 3

The following cautionary label for the laser is attached to the frame which you can see when
opening the front lower cover.

Fig. 3-39

Cautions:
- Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the
power cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION.
LASER BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the
equipment.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 67
3.10.3 Slit glass cleaning mechanism
The laser optical unit has a protective shutter on its upper section. This shutter is opened or closed with
the drive from the shutter motor (M38). Two shutter sensors (for home position, S24 and for end
position, S25) detect the phase of the shutter when it is opened or closed. When the shutter is closed,
the shutter sensor (home position, S24) is ON.
A cleaning brush installed inside of the shutter cleans the slit glass when the shutter is opened or
closed. The shutter performs cleaning by opening or closing itself every time the power is turned ON,
printing starts, printing ends or image quality control is performed.

Brush

Shutter sensor (end position)

Shutter sensor (home position) Slit glass

Shutter motor Shutter


Link

Fig. 3-40

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 68
3.11 Paper Feeding System

3.11.1 General Descriptions


This chapter explains how the system works to pick up paper from the drawer or bypass tray and
transport it to the 2nd transfer position.
The paper feeding system mainly consists of the pickup roller, feed roller, separation roller, transport
roller, registration roller, bypass paper sensor, drawer empty sensor, bypass feed sensor, drawer feed
sensor, registration sensor and drive system for these components. The feed/transport motor, 3
Transport motor-1,Transport motor-2, Feed motor and registration motor drives the above rollers.

12
8
10
1
14
3
2
9

13
15
11
24
23 22
21
7
17
19, 20
23 22 18
21

23 22 21 5 4
6
16

23 22
21

Fig. 3-41

No. Name No. Name


1 Bypass feed roller 13 Bypass paper size detection sensor
2 Bypass separation roller 14 Bypass paper sensor
3 Bypass pickup roller 15 Bypass feed sensor
4 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer feed roller 16 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer detection sensor
5 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer pickup roller 17 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer transport sensor
6 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer separation roller 18 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer feed sensor
7 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer transport roller 19 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer bottom sensor
8 Registration roller (rubber roller) 20 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer empty sensor
9 Registration roller (metal roller) 21 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer tray-up sensor
10 Registration sensor 22 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer paper size
detection sensor-1
11 Media sensor 23 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer paper size
detection sensor-2
12 Transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor 24 Feed cover sensor

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 69
<Tandem LCF model>

The composition of the 1st and the 2nd drawers of the Tandem LCF model is the same as that of the 4-
drawer model.
The 3rd and the 4th drawers are not installed but instead the Tandem LCF is installed.

T15 T19 T10 T4


T11 T13 T16 T20 T6 T1 T8
T7 T9

T3
T2 T5

T17 T14 T22 T18 T21 T12


Fig. 3-42

No. Name No. Name


T1 Tandem LCF feed roller T12 Tandem LCF bottom sensor
T2 Tandem LCF separation roller T13 Standby side tray detection sensor
T3 Tandem LCF pickup roller T14 Standby side empty sensor
T4 Tandem LCF transport roller T15 Stopper opening/closing detection sensor
(front)
T5 Tandem LCF detection sensor T16 Stopper opening/closing detection sensor
(rear)
T6 Tandem LCF empty sensor T17 End fence home position sensor
T7 Tandem LCF tray-up sensor T18 End fence stop position sensor
T8 Tandem LCF transport sensor T19 Stopper opening/closing solenoid (front)
T9 Tandem LCF feed sensor T20 Stopper opening/closing solenoid (rear)
T10 Tandem LCF solenoid T21 Tandem LCF tray-up motor
T11 Standby side tray paper amount detection T22 Tandem LCF end fence motor
sensor

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 70
3.11.2 Composition

Feeding system
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer feeding 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer pickup roller PM parts
unit 1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer feed roller PM parts
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer separation roller PM parts
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer transfer roller PM parts
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer feed sensor S78/S86/S94/S102 3
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer transport sensor S77/S85/S93/S101
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer tray-up sensor S76/S84/S92/S100
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer empty sensor S75/S83/S91/S99
1st / 2nd / 3rd / 4th drawer detection sensor S73/S81/S89/S97
Bypass feeding unit Bypass pickup roller PM parts
Bypass feed roller PM parts
Bypass separation roller PM parts
Bypass paper roller S71
Bypass feed sensor S72
Bypass transport sensor SOL8
Bypass pickup solenoid S70
Bypass motor M12
Drive section, other 3rd / 4th drawer transport clutch CLT4/CLT6
3rd / 4th drawer feed clutch CLT5/CLT7
Transport motor-1/Transport motor-2 M40/M41
Feed motor M42
Feed/transport motor M43
Registration motor M39
Registration roller
Registration sensor S52
Transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor S47
Tray-up motor-1/Tray-up motor-2 M44/M45
Tandem LCF Tandem LCF pickup roller PM parts
Tandem LCF feed roller PM parts
Tandem LCF separation roller PM parts
Tandem LCF transport roller
Tandem LCF feed sensor S93
Tandem LCF transport sensor S94
Tandem LCF pickup solenoid SOL9
Tandem LCF end fence motor M47
Tandem LCF tray-up motor M46

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 71
3.11.3 Functions

1. Pickup roller (Drawers and bypass feed)


This roller moves up and down and draws out the paper from the bypass tray or drawer and
transport it to the feed roller.

2. Feed roller (Drawers and bypass feed)


This roller is placed against the separation roller. It transports the paper from the pickup roller to the
transport roller.

3. Separation roller (Drawers and bypass feed)


This roller is placed against the feed roller. When two sheets of paper or more are transported from
the pickup roller, the load of the torque limiter of the separation roller is heavier than the frictional
force between the sheets. As the result, the separation roller is stopped and the lower paper is not
advanced any further. When only one sheet is transported from the pickup roller, the separation
roller rotates following the feed roller.

4. Transport roller (Drawers and bypass feed)


This roller transports the paper sent from the feed roller to the registration roller.

5. Registration roller
Paper transported from the transport roller is pushed against the registration roller which aligns the
leading edge of the paper.
Then, the registration rollers rotate to transport the paper to the transfer unit.

6. Bypass paper sensor (S71)


This sensor detects if paper is set in the bypass tray. If it is, bypass feeding always comes before
drawer feeding.

7. Media sensor (S69)


This equipment has a media sensor to measure the thickness of copy paper.
The media sensor detects the thickness of paper that is fed only from feeding devices other than the
bypass tray. The sensor has 2 functions as follows:
(1) The sensor classifies plain paper (16.8 to 27.6 lb.) into plain paper 1 (relatively thin plain paper)
and plain paper 2 (relatively thick plain paper) and controls fusing temperature accordingly.
(2) The sensor judges if a users media type setting is correct according to the thickness
measurement result by itself. When the sensor judges that the setting is not correct, printing
automatically stops. (Error code: E071-E076 (Media type mis-setting jam))
Even though media types are classified with its paper weight in general, the thickness of paper is not
always proportional to the paper weight. Therefore the sensor makes the equipment stop printing
only when a users media type setting is obviously incorrect.
Whether enabling or disabling the function (2) above can be switched in the code 08-4598.
In case the media sensor fails, no error code is displayed. In this case, as for the function (1) above,
paper set in the code 08-4599 is automatically selected, and the function (2) above is automatically
disabled. Therefore the malfunction of the media sensor does not affect the equipment operation
and thus printing is not disturbed.
The media sensor malfunction is detected with the output value of the sensor. If an abnormal value
is output, the sensor is judged as in a faulty condition. This status is recorded in an error history.
(Error code: CFA0 or CFA1 (Media sensor detection abnormality))
Even if the error CFA0 or CFA1 occurred, the media sensor outputs values again after the
equipment was recovered from the sleep mode or its power was turned OFF and then back ON. If
the output value is normal, the sensor then returns to its normal detection status.
Do not bring a magnet or other magnetized materials closer to the media sensor because it
measures minute displacement amounts with magnetoresistance change.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 72
8. Empty sensor (S75/S83/S91/S99)
This is a transmissive-type sensor and detects the availability of paper in the drawer by using an
actuator. When there is no paper in the drawer, the actuator blocks the light path of the sensor, and
the sensor determines that there is no paper.

9. Feed sensor (S78/S86/S94/S102)


This sensor detects if the leading edge or trailing edge of the paper has passed the feed roller. It
also detects jamming such as misfeeding.
3
10.Transport sensor (S77/S85/S93/S101)
This is a reflective sensor whose purpose is to directly detect if paper is set or not, without using any
device such as a sensor arm. Transport sensor detects if the leading edge or trailing edge of paper
passed the transport roller. They also detects jams like misfeeding.

11. Registration sensor (S52)


This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the registration roller and the
trailing edge of the paper has passed the registration roller.

12.Drawer tray-up sensor (S76/S84/S92/S100)


This sensor stops the tray at the predetermined height when the tray is moved up. When the tray-up
sensor is turned ON, the tray-up motor is turned OFF to stop the upward movement of the tray.

13.Drawer detection sensor (S73/S81/S89/S97)


This sensor detects if the drawer is fully inserted.

14.Feed clutch (3rd drawer (CLT5) / 4th drawer (CLT7))


This is a clutch used to transmit the drive from the feed/transport motor to the drawer pickup roller
and drawer feed roller.

15.Drawer transport clutch (3rd drawer (CLT4) / 4th drawer (CLT6))


This is a clutch used to transmit the drive from the feed/transport motor to the transport roller.
When the clutch is turned ON, the transport roller rotates at high speed to transport paper.

16.Feed/transport motor (M43)


This motor drives the pickup rollers, feed rollers and transport rollers of the drawers and bypass tray.

17.Registration motor (M39)


This motor drives the registration roller. This stepping motor transports paper in the transfer direction
in time with the image transfer to align the paper with the leading edge of the image.

18.Tray-up motor-1/-2 (M44, M45)


When this motor rotates normally, the tray in the 1st drawer moves up, and when the motor rotates
reversely, the tray in the 2nd drawer moves up.

19.Bypass motor (M12)


This stepping motor drives the bypass pickup roller, feed roller and transport roller.

20.Bypass pickup solenoid (SOL8)


This is a solenoid to move down the bypass pickup roller.

21.Bypass paper size detection sensor (S70)


This sensor works directly with the sidewalls of the bypass tray to detect the paper width on the tray.

22.Drawer paper size detection sensor-1/2 (S79/S80/S87/S88/S95/S96/S103/S104).


These sensors detect the size of the paper placed in each drawer.
Paper sizes can be detected with the combination of switch signals that are sent by the movement
of the end and side guides in each drawer.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 73
3.11.4 Description of Operation

[ 1 ] Drive of rollers
The drive of each motor in the paper feeding area activates the paper transfer roller as follows.
Transport motor-1 (M40) 1st drawer transport roller
Transport motor-2( M41) 2nd drawer transport roller
Feed motor (M42) 1st drawer feed roller
Normal rotation
1st drawer pickup roller
2nd drawer feed roller
Reverse rotation
2nd drawer pickup roller

Feed/transport motor 3rd drawer transport clutch(CLT4) 3rd drawer transport roller
(M43) 4th drawer transport roller
4th drawer transport clutch(CLT6)
3rd drawer feed roller
3rd drawer feed clutch(CLT5)
3rd drawer pickup roller
4th drawer feed roller
4th drawer feed clutch(CLT7) 4th drawer pickup roller
Bypass pickup motor Bypass feed roller
(M12)
Bypass pickup roller
Registration motor (M39) Registration roller
Tray-up motor-1 (M44) Trays in 1st/2nd drawer
Tray-up motor-2 (M45) Trays in 3rd/4th drawer

Registration roller (rubber)


Registration roller(Metal)

Registration motor (M39)

Transport roller Transport motor-1(M40)

Feed motor(M42)
Feed/transport drive unit
Transport roller

Transport motor-2(M41)

3rd drawer transport clutch Tray-up motor-1


(CLT4) (M44)

3rd drawer feed clutch (CLT5)


Feed/transport motor (M43)
4th drawer transport clutch
(CLT6) Feed/transport unit

4th drawer feed clutch


(CLT7) Tray-up motor-2
(M45)

Rear view

Fig. 3-43

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 74
[ 2 ] Operation of bypass pickup roller
When the bypass pickup solenoid (SOL8) is turned ON, the plunger is pulled, and then the lever is
rotated. The pickup arm is then brought down with its own weight. When the bypass pickup solenoid
(SOL8) is turned OFF, the pickup arm is brought up by the spring force.
The driving force transmitted through the bypass motor (M12) is transmitted to the bypass feed roller
through the shaft and then to the bypass pickup roller through the timing belt. The roller is rotated by
this driving force.

Bypass pickup solenoid(SOL8)


3
Bypass paper size detection sensor(S70)
Bypass paper sensor(S71)
Bypass feed roller
Bypass pickup roller
Pickup arm

Bypass separation roller

Bypass transport roller

Bypass motor(M12) Bypass feed sensor(S72)


Fig. 3-44

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 75
[ 3 ] Operation of drawer pickup roller
When the drawer is inserted, the protrusion at the rear side of the drawer pushes the lever to the
direction of A. Then the pickup roller and roller holder are lowered by the spring force.

Pickup roller

Lever

A Insertion direction

Fig. 3-45

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 76
[ 4 ] Paper size detection
This equipment automatically detects the size of the paper placed in each drawer.
The end and side guides in each drawer are moved according to the paper size and a pusher moves
together with the end and side guides.
Then the protrusion of the pusher pushes each button of the drawer paper size detection sensors-1 and
-2.
Thus the paper size is detected with the combination of the pushing statuses of the drawer paper size
detection sensors-1 and -2.
The drawer paper size detection sensor-1 detects the movement of the side guides while the drawer 3
paper size detection sensor-2 detects that of the end guide.

End guide

Drawer paper size


Side guide detection sensor-2

Drawer paper size detection sensor-1


Fig. 3-46

[Example]
The positions of the guides and the pusher in cases of A3 and A4-R are shown below as examples.

A3 A4-R

End guide

Pusher

Side guide

Drawer paper size detection sensor-1/2

Fig. 3-47

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 77
[ 5 ] General operation

[A] From power-ON to ready status


1. When the equipment is turned ON, the tray-up motor-1 (M44) is activated and the 1st drawer tray
starts to rise. When the tray-up sensor (S76) is turned ON (LH), the tray-up motor-1 (M44) is
turned OFF, and the tray is stopped. At this time, if the empty sensor (S75) is OFF (L), it is judged
that there is no paper in the drawer.
If the empty sensor (S75) is ON (H), there is paper in the drawer. The tray stops at raised position
regardless of availability of paper. The tray-up motor-1 (M44) then starts to rotate in reverse and the
2nd drawer is raised. The 2nd drawer is stopped in the same manner as the 1st drawer, and the
empty sensor (S75) detects if there is any paper in the drawer.

2. If the drawer is not completely inserted when the equipment is turned ON, the tray for that drawer is
not raised. When the drawer is inserted completely, the tray is raised and checks the availability of
the paper.

3. If either of the sensors on the transport path is ON (means there is paper on the transport path)
when the equipment is turned ON, it is determined that a paper jam has occurred and no operation
is enabled until the paper is removed.

[B] Ready status


1. After the tray is moved up and availability of paper is checked as described above, the equipment
enters the ready status.
At ready status, the tray remains at raised position.

2. When a drawer is inserted or removed at ready status, the tray is raised again to check the
availability of paper.

[C] Bypass feeding


• The bypass paper sensor (S71) detects availability of paper.
• The bypass pickup solenoid (SOL8) is turned ON and the bypass pickup roller is lowered.
• The bypass motor (M12) is turned ON and then the bypass pickup roller, bypass feed roller and
bypass transport roller are rotated and start feeding.
• The leading edge of paper turns ON the bypass feed sensor (S72) and bypass pickup solenoid
(SOL8) is turned OFF. Then the bypass pickup roller is raised.
• The leading edge of paper turns ON the registration sensor (S52) and the paper is aligned by the
registration roller.
• The bypass motor (M12) is turned OFF, and then the bypass pickup roller, bypass feed roller and
bypass transport roller are stopped.
• The registration motor (M39) is turned ON and the paper is transported to the 2nd transfer position.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 78
[D] Drawer feeding

[D-1] 2nd drawer


• The feed motor and transfer motor are turned ON, and the pickup roller, feed roller and transport
roller are rotated to start feeding paper.
• Passing of the leading edge of the paper turns ON the 2nd drawer feed sensor, then the 2nd
transport sensor is turned ON.
• Passing of the leading edge of the paper turns ON the registration sensor and the paper is aligned
by the registration roller. 3
• The transport motor is turned OFF and the transport roller is stopped.
• The registration motor and transport motor are turned ON and the paper is transported to the 2nd
transfer position.

[D-2] 1st drawer


• The feed motor and the transport motor are turned ON, and the pickup roller, feed roller and
transport roller are rotated to start feeding paper.
• Passing of the leading edge of the paper turns ON the 1st drawer feed sensor, then the 1st transport
sensor is turned ON.
• Passing of the leading edge of the paper turns ON the registration sensor and the paper is aligned
by the registration roller.
• The transport motor is turned OFF and the transport roller is stopped.
• The registration motor and transport motor are turned ON and the paper is transported to the 2nd
transfer position.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 79
3.12 Process Unit Related Section

3.12.1 General description


The equipment has 4 process units (EPU: Electrographic Processing Unit). Each process unit consists
of the drum cleaner unit and developer unit which are unified, and it corresponds to the image forming
process of Y, M, C and K colors. This chapter describes the development (developer unit) which is a
process of making toner adhere to the drum.
The developer material which is comprised of a mixture of toner and carrier, and is filled in the
developer unit of each color. The toner is charged to a negative polarity and the carrier to a positive
polarity, due to the friction with each other caused by mixing in the developer unit. The charged toner is
supplied to the photoconductive drum surface by means of a magnetic roller, allowing it to adhere to the
areas on the drum surface where the potential is lower than the developer bias which is applied to the
magnetic roller. Through this process, the latent images are formed on the photoconductive drum
surface.

Drum(Y) Drum(M) Drum(C) Drum(K)

Drum cleaner unit (M)


Drum cleaner unit (K)
Drum cleaner unit (Y)
Drum cleaner unit (C)
Temperature/Humidity sensor

Waste toner box

Fig. 3-48

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 80
Drum surface potential sensor *1 Drum thermistor
Shutter *1 Drum cleaner unit
Developer sleeve Drum cleaning blade

Drum
Main charger grid 3
Discharge LED

Needle electrode
cleaner

Mixer Needle electrode


Developer unit
Auto toner sensor Doctor blade Main charger unit
Fig. 3-49

*1: Only for K station in e-STUDIO6550C/6570C

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 81
3.12.2 Composition

Process unit (Y, M, C, K) Drum cleaner unit Drum PM parts


Cleaning blade PM parts
Recovery blade
Blade side seal
Toner recovery auger
Main charger unit Main charger grid PM parts
Needle electrode PM parts
Needle electrode cleaner PM parts
Discharge LED ERS-Y, -M, -C, -K
V0 sensor unit Drum surface potential (V0) S34
sensor
(e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only)
V0 sensor shutter solenoid -K SOL4
(e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only)
Drum thermistor-Y, -K THM1, THM2
Needle electrode cleaner motor- M23, M24, M25, M26
K/-C/-M/-Y
Needle electrode cleaner S30, S31, S32, S33
detection sensor-K/-C/-M/-Y
Main charger ozone exhaust fan- F17, F18, F19, F20
K/-C/-M/-Y
Auger lock detection sensor S42
Developer unit Developer material
Auto-toner sensor S26, S27, S28, S29
Developer sleeve (Magnetic
roller)
Doctor blade
Mixer
Drive section, other Temperature/Humidity sensor S12
Ozone filter-1, -2 PM parts
Ozone suctioning fan F24
High-voltage transformer HVT1, HVT2
Developer unit motor-K/-YMC M29, M31
Developer unit mixer motor-K/-YMC M30, M32
Drum motor-K/-YMC M27, M28
Toner filter PM parts
Scattered toner suctioning fan F25
EPU cooling fan F14

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 82
3.12.3 Functions

1. Drum
Drum is made of a cylindrical aluminum base coated with a thin film of organic photosensitive
(photoconductive) substance. Photoconductive object becomes insulative (high electrical
resistance) when it is not exposed to lights and becomes conductive (low electrical resistance) when
it is exposed to lights. This object is called photoconductor.

2. Drum cleaner unit 3


- Cleaning blade
This blade is pressed against the drum surface with a constant force by pressure springs, and
scrapes off the residual toner on the drum surface.
- Recovery blade
This blade prevents the toner which was scraped off by the cleaning blade from being scattered
to the outside.
- Toner recovery auger
This auger carries the residual toner scraped off to the waste toner box.

3. Main charger
The main charger in this equipment consists of insulated terminals having a U-shaped section and a
needle electrode attached between them. When a high voltage is applied to the needle electrode,
the air around it is charged (ionized). The ionized air then flows into the drum causing it to be
charged. This phenomenon is called “corona discharge”. At the same time, a control bias is applied
to the main charger grid to control the charging amount. In a dark place, negative charge is evenly
applied onto the drum surface by the corona discharge and this grid. In addition, a cleaner is
installed to clean up the blot attached on the needle electrode.
- Needle electrode
The needle electrode has aligned needles and their points perform the corona discharge.
These points (electrodes) discharge toward the drum in one direction to realize the more
efficient discharging comparing to the charger wire which discharges in a radial direction.
Therefore, the needle electrode enables to reduce the ozone amount.

4. Drum thermistor (THM1, THM2)


Since the photoconductive characteristic of the drum surface changes depending on the
temperature of the drum surface, the drum thermistor detects the temperature of the drum surface
and controls to gain the charging potential according to the environment.
The equipment uses 2 drum thermistors and they detect surface temperature of K and Y drums
respectively.

5. Discharge LED (ERS-Y, -M, -C, -K)


Discharge is a process to decrease or eliminate the static electricity on the drum surface.
The electrical resistance of the photosensitive layer is decreased by the light, and the residual
charge on the drum surface is neutralized and eliminated (cleaned). Electrical potential of the drum
surface is fixed to a certain amount before the drum is charged.

6. Temperature/humidity sensor (S12)


This sensor measures the environment inside the equipment. The values of the temperature and
humidity detected inside the equipment are output to the LGC board.

7. Ozone filter
Ozone produced by corona discharge of the main charger is exhausted through this filter.
The catalyzer of the ozone filter degrades the ozone.

8. Ozone suctioning fan (F24)


This fan sucks in air contains ozone generated by the main charger and exhausts it through the
ozone filter-1.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 83
9. High-voltage transformer (HVT)
A circuit generates the output control voltage Vc of the main charger bias, main charger grid bias,
1st transfer roller bias, 2nd transfer roller bias, and developer bias.

10.Drum motor-K
This motor drives the K drum.
The drive of the motor is transmitted with the gear from the drum motor to the K drum.
To align the phases of the K drum and color drums and enhance the color registration accuracy, the
signal change of the color drum phase sensor and the K drum phase sensor works as a trigger to
stop the motor.
For further color registration accuracy, the gears are precisely assembled.

11. Drum motor-YMC


These motors drive the Y, M and C drums.
The drive of the motor is transmitted with the gear from the drum motor to the M (C) drum and then
to the Y drum.
To align the phases of the K drum and color drums and enhance the color registration accuracy, the
signal change of the color drum phase sensor and the K drum phase sensor works as a trigger to
stop the motor.
For further color registration accuracy, the gears are precisely assembled.

12.Developer unit motor-K


This motor drives the auger to carry waste toner gathered with the K developer magnetic roller and
K cleaning blade to the waste toner transport path.
To maintain the rotational speeds of the photoconductive drum and the developer magnetic roller at
a specified ratio, the developer unit motor rotates at a speed proportionate to the paper transport
speed for special modes such as the thick paper mode.
The drive of the motor is transmitted with the gear, and the motor is connected to the developer unit
with a coupling.

13.Developer unit mixer motor-K


This motor drives a mixer to mix and transport K developer material.
The rotational speed of this motor is constant in any mode because the transport amount of the
developer material must be stable in any special mode such as the thick paper mode.
The drive of the motor is transmitted with the gear, and the motor is connected to the developer unit
with a coupling.

14.Developer unit motor-YMC


These motors drive the auger to carry waste toner gathered with the YMC developer magnetic
rollers and YMC cleaning blades to the waste toner transport path.
To maintain the rotational speeds of the photoconductive drum and the developer magnetic roller at
a specified ratio, the developer unit motor rotates at a speed proportionate to the paper transport
speed for special modes such as the thick paper mode.
The drive of the motor is transmitted with the gear, and the motor is connected to the developer unit
with a coupling.

15.Developer unit mixer motor-YMC


These motors drive a mixer to mix and transport YMC developer materials.
The rotational speed of these motors is constant in any mode because the transport amount of the
developer material must be stable in any special mode such as the thick paper mode.
The drive of the motor is transmitted with the gear, and the motor is connected to the developer unit
with a coupling.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 84
16.Developer material
The developer material consists of the carrier and toner. Normally developer material does not need
to be replaced periodically. However, replacement may be needed depending on the use condition.

17.Mixer
The carrier and toner are frictionized each other when the developer material is stirred. Then the
carrier is positively charged (+) and the toner is negatively charged (–), and the toner is adhered by
the electrostatic force.
3
18.Developer sleeve (Magnetic roller)
These aluminum rollers have magnets inside. The developer material is pulled by these magnets to
form a magnetic brush. The magnets are fixed at their position so that only the sleeve rotates. By
this rotation, the developer material is transported to the developer sleeve. Then the magnetic brush
formed at the developer sleeve sweeps over the drum surface and thus development is performed.

19.Doctor blade
The doctor blade controls the amount of the developer material from the developer sleeve so that
the magnetic brush of the developer material can contact with the drum surface properly.

20.Auto-toner sensor (S26, S27, S28, S29)


To print out a precise image, the proportion (toner density ratio) of the carrier and the toner in the
developer material needs to be always constant. The magnetic bridge circuit in the black auto-toner
sensor detects the toner ratio in the developer material. Toner is supplied from the sub-hopper when
the toner contained in the developer material is running out.

21.Toner motor (M15, M16, M17, M18)


These motors drive the paddles and auger in the toner cartridge and transport the toner filled in the
cartridge to the sub-hopper. Each toner cartridge of Y, M, C and K mounts one toner motor
correspondingly.

22.Sub-hopper toner motor (M19, M20, M21, M22)


This motor transports toner in the sub-hopper to the developer unit. One motor is installed for each
developer unit of YMCK colors.

23.Waste toner transport motor (M33)


The waste toner transport motor rotates the auger in the corresponding unit and transports the
waste toner which exits from each YMCK developer unit and the transfer belt cleaner unit, as well as
the waste developer material which exits from each YMCK developer unit.

24.Auger lock detection sensor (S42)


This sensor detects locking of the waste toner transport auger. When the waste toner transport
auger is locked due to the overload or malfunction of the motor, this sensor detects it and the service
call (CD71) occurs.

25.Waste toner amount detection sensor (S13)


The waste toner amount detection sensor is a transmissive sensor whose purpose is to detect the
amount of waste toner in the waste toner box.
This sensor detects when the amount of waste toner has reached approx. 80% of the toner full.

26.Waste toner box full detection sensor (S14)


The waste toner box full detection sensor is a transmissive sensor whose purpose is to check the
sensor section at the side of the waste toner box. When the Waste toner box becomes full of waste
toner and the accumulated waste toner shields the sensor path, this sensor detects that the waste
toner box is full.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 85
27.Waste toner box
This collects the residual toner scraped off on the drum surface by the cleaning blade and residual
toner scraped off on the transfer belt by the transfer belt cleaning blade.
Developer material discharged in SR development is also recovered into the waste toner box.

28.Waste toner box detection sensor (S16)


This sensor detects if the waste toner box is set and whether the waste toner box cover is opened or
closed.

29.Toner filter
This collects toner scattered out of the developer unit (developer sleeve).

30.Scattered toner suctioning fan (F25)


This fan sucks in toner scattered out of the developer unit (developer sleeve) and collects it through
the toner filter.

31.Toner cartridge paddle rotation detection sensor-K/C/M/Y(S8/S9/S10/S11)


These sensors detect the rotational status of the paddle of each toner cartridge. The rotational
status can be detected with an actuator rotating together with the paddle.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 86
3.12.4 Electric Circuit Description

[ 1 ] Drum Surface Potential Sensor Control Circuit

[ 1-1 ] General description


The drum surface potential sensor measures the surface potential of the drum when the drum is
charged. Based on the measured value, this sensor controls the main charger grid bias voltage, and
thus can control the drum surface potential accurately.
3

[ 1-2 ] Configuration
The configuration of this control circuit is shown below.

• Drum surface potential sensor:


Measures the drum surface potential.

• Drum surface potential sensor shutter:


This shutter prevents toner and developer material from adhering to the drum surface potential
sensor.

• Control section (LGC board):


Calculates the main charger grid bias voltage to be applied when the image quality control is
performed, then controls the high-voltage transformer to adjust its bias voltage output.

• High-voltage transformer:
Generates and supplies the bias voltage of the main charger grid.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 87
3.13 Transfer unit

3.13.1 General Descriptions


Transfer is a process of decaling a toner image from the photoconductive drum onto paper.
A toner image formed on the photoconductive drum is temporarily transferred onto the transfer belt,
and the toner image is then transferred from the transfer belt onto paper. The first transfer from the
drum to the transfer belt is called the 1st transfer, and the second transfer from the transfer belt to paper
is called the 2nd transfer. To form a color image, the images of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and
black (K) are transferred and overlaid on the transfer belt in order, and then the overlaid images are
transferred onto paper.
After the completion of the 2nd transfer, the residual toner on the transfer belt is scraped off by the
transfer belt cleaning blade and then transported to the waste toner box.

Waste toner auger 2nd transfer roller


2nd transfer facing roller
Cleaning facing roller 2nd transfer side paper
2nd transfer facing roller cleaning pad
Cleaning facing roller cleaning pad clinging detection sensor
1st transfer roller(C) TRU waste toner amount
Tension roller
1st transfer roller(Y) 1st transfer roller(K) detection sensor
Transfer belt
1st transfer roller(M)

Drum Drum Drum Drum


(Y) (M) (C) (K)
Image quality sensor
Lift roller Image position aligning sensor
(front/center/rear)
2nd transfer roller
Transfer belt cam motor cleaning blade
Transfer belt contact/release
2nd transfer roller lubricant unit
detection sensor
2nd transfer roller
Transfer belt cleaning blade contact/release detection sensor
TRU waste toner box
Fig. 3-50

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 88
3.13.2 Composition

Transfer belt unit Transfer belt


1st transfer roller Y, M, C, K
Cleaning facing roller
Tension roller
2nd transfer facing roller
Lift roller 3
Idling roller
Transfer belt cam motor M14
Transfer belt contact/release detection sensor S46
2nd transfer facing roller cleaning pad PM parts
Cleaning facing roller cleaning pad
Transfer belt cleaning Transfer belt cleaning blade PM parts
Transfer belt cleaner side seal PM parts
Transfer belt motor M13
2nd transfer unit 2nd transfer roller PM parts
2nd transfer roller lubricant unit PM parts
TRU waste toner box
TRU waste toner amount detection sensor S17
2nd transfer side paper clinging detection S51
sensor
Image position aligning sensor S20 / S21/S22
(front /center/rear)
2nd transfer roller contact/release S50
detection sensor
Image quality sensor S23
2nd transfer cam motor M48

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 89
3.13.3 Self steering mechanism
This equipment has a self-steering mechanism to prevent the transfer belt from leaning to one side.
The composition of the self-steering mechanism is shown below.

Transfer belt

Guide roller Gear


(Detection roller)
Rack and pinion

Slider
Guide roller
(Detection roller)
Gear Rib

Steering angle indicator

Steering roller (Tension roller)


-2 -1 0 1 2
Fig. 3-51

Operation flow
1. The transfer belt is inclined to the front or rear side.
2. The rib of the inclined belt contacts with either of the guide rollers and thus makes the gears rotate.
3. The gears rotate and thus their lead screws make the slider shift forward or backward.
4. The steering roller is inclined with the rack and pinion mechanism.
5. The inclined steering roller moves the inclined transfer belt to the original position.
6. The steering roller stops the leaning at a position in which the rib of the belt no longer contacts with
the guide roller.
Notes:
• The tolerance for the cutting angle of the self-steering mechanism is normally +/- 2 degrees.
• If the cutting angle does not fall within the acceptable range, check and correct the following:
1. Is the equipment installed on a flat surface? Is the equipment installed slantwise?
2. Is the transfer belt unit assembled correctly?
3. Is the transfer belt installed correctly?

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 90
3.14 Image Quality Control
Image quality control is divided into image quality process control and image quality TRC control. When
the e-BRIDGE Controller is installed, the image quality TRC control is performed with a single test
pattern, and when the EFI Printer Board (optional) is installed, it is performed with 2 test patterns.

3.14.1 General Description


In this equipment, image quality is controlled with the image quality sensor (S23).
In the image quality control, image forming conditions or image processing conditions are automatically 3
adjusted so as to minimize the change in the image density or tone reproduction caused by the
fluctuation of the use environment or the life of the supply items.
At first, the image quality sensor (S23) emits light in order to output the reflected light amount voltage
with no toner image formed on the transfer belt.
This reflected light amount voltage is then converted analog-to-digital to be output to the LGC board as
a reflected light amount signal. The light amount voltage of the light source of the sensor is adjusted so
that the output value of the reflected light amount signal will correspond with a value set in advance.
Next, a test pattern is developed on the transfer belt, and the reflected light amount signal output from
the developed test pattern is detected as the toner amount for a toner image. This series of operations
is the scanning of a toner image (detection of the output value).
3 test patterns are provided for scanning this toner image. Each of them is used to determine the
following conditions:

1. Image quality process control test pattern


The toner image of the test pattern is scanned and the image forming conditions are determined to
be approximated to the preset value.
2. Image quality TRC control test pattern
The toner image of the test pattern is scanned and the image processing conditions are determined
according to the value output from the toner image.
3. Image quality TRC control test pattern for the EFI Printer Board (optional)
(Only for the equipment with the EFI Printer Board (optional) installed.)
The toner image of the test pattern is scanned and the image processing conditions are determined
according to the value output from the toner image.

In addition, a shutter operated by the Image quality shutter solenoid (SOL3) is equipped on the light
receiving/emitting surfaces to prevent stain to the sensor.

Image quality control unit

Image quality sensor

Image position aligning sensor (rear)

Image quality shutter solenoid

Image position aligning sensor (center)

Image position aligning sensor (front)

Fig. 3-52

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 91
3.15 Fuser Unit

3.15.1 General Description


Toner is fused by applying heat and pressure on the transferred image on the paper which is trans-
ported to the fuser unit. The paper is then transported to the bridge unit. The fuser unit consists of the
fuser belt, fuser roller, heat pipe roller, IH coil, pressure roller, separation fingers, separation plate,
thermopiles, thermistors, thermostats, sensor etc.
The fuser roller and pressure roller in the fuser unit are driven by the fuser motor.

Pressure roller contact / Fuser belt rotation detection sensor


release clutch
Rotor
Pressure roller thermostat
Heat pipe roller (center / side)
Fuser belt
edge thermistor Separation
plate Pressure roller contact /
release detection sensor
Separation
Fuser belt fingers
thermostat

Fuser belt
thermopile

Fuser belt
Fuser roller
Fuser unit gear
Fuser belt guide (Rear Side)
Pressure roller thermistor
Pressure roller heater lamp
(center / side)
Pressure roller Pressure roller edge thermistor

(Front Side) (Rear Side)

IH board cooling fan-1 IH board Exit paper cooling fan (rear)

Fuser motor

IH board cooling fan-2 IH coil

Fig. 3-53

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 92
3.15.2 Composition

Fuser belt section Fuser belt PM parts


Fuser belt guide PM parts
Fuser roller PM parts
Heat pipe roller
Fuser belt thermostat THMO4
Fuser belt edge thermistor THM6
3
Fuser belt thermopile THMP1
Fuser belt rotation detection sensor S49
Separation plate
Pressure roller section Pressure roller PM parts
Separation fingers PM parts
Pressure roller heater lamp LAMP
Pressure roller center thermistor THM3
Pressure roller side thermistor THM4
Pressure roller edge thermistor THM5
Pressure roller center thermostat THMO2
Pressure roller side thermostat THMO3
Pressure roller contact / release clutch CLT1
Pressure roller contact / release detection sensor S48
IH coil section IH coil IH COIL
IH board IH
IH board cooling fan-1 F8
IH board cooling fan-2 F9
Drive section / Others Fuser motor M6
Exit paper cooling fan (rear) F15
Fuser unit jam releasing LED LED

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 93
[ 1 ] Difference of Fuser units
The differences between e-STUDIO5520C/6520C/6530C and e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C, e-
STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C are as follows.
* The direction for installing the connector is upside down. (Check the position of the dowel and the
terminal of the connector to distinguish them.)
* The stamp (lot) in e-STUDIO5520C/6520C/6530C is black, the one in e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/
6550C, e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C is red.

e-STUDIO5520C/6520C/6530C e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C
e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C

Fig. 3-54

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 94
[ 2 ] Difference for Destination of Fuser Unit
The fuser unit for the MJD/MJC destination was developed for e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C.
However, it has been integrated with the ASD/AUD destination for e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C
Mark Mark

200M

200A
ASD, AUD ASD, AUD,MJD/MJC
(Mark: 200A) (Mark: 200A)

Center heater lamp


Side heater lamp Center heater lamp
Side heater lamp

MJD/MJC
(Mark: 200M)

Center heater lamp


Side heater lamp
Sub heater lamp
Fig. 3-55

Notes:
• The fuser unit (FUSER-FC65-220M) for the MJD/MJC destination for e-STUDIO5540C/
6540C/6550C is not available for e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C. If the non-corresponding
fuser unit is installed mistakenly, a service call “C4B1” error will occur due to the incorrect
destination.
• Moreover, be sure not to install the fuser unit (FUSER-FC65-220A) with two heater lamps in
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C for the MJD/MJC destination. Otherwise, a service call
“C4B1” error will occur.

Combination of the mark and destination


Mark e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C Remarks
115 NAD NAD
200A ASD, AUD, CND ASD, AUD, MJD/MJC
200M MJD/MJC N/A 3 heater lamps
200C N/A CND

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 95
[ 3 ] Heat pipe roller
A heat pipe roller consists of a cylindrical pipe containing pure water and is sealed.

[1] [2]

Fig. 3-56

[1] Heart pipe


[2] Liquid (Water)

When external heat is applied to the heat pipe roller, the internal water evaporates. This can make the
temperature of the whole roller even in a short time.
Notes:
• Store the heat pipe roller horizontally.
• When disposing of the heat pipe, make a hole in it and pour out the water inside, otherwise it
could burst.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 96
3.15.3 Electric Circuit Description

[ 1 ] Fuser unit control circuit

[ 1-1 ] Configuration
This equipment employs an external IH coil unit for heating the fuser belt and two or three (center, side
and sub) heater lamps with a different light emitting (heating) point in the pressure roller. The sub
heater lamp is included only for the triple type. IH coils in the IH coil unit generate a magnetic field to
heat the fuser unit with a high-frequency current carried inside of them. The heater lamps heat the 3
pressure roller by turning themselves ON with a command from the ASIC of the LGC board.

The surface temperature of the fuser belt is detected with the fuser belt edge thermistor (THM6),
together with the fuser belt thermopile (THMP1: non-contact sensor). The surface temperature of the
pressure roller is detected with the pressure roller center thermistor (THM3), the pressure roller side
thermistor (THM4), the pressure roller edge thermistor (THM5). The detected temperature data are
sent to the ASIC through an A/D converter. Based on the sent temperature data, the ASIC then turns
the IH coils and the heater lamps ON or OFF to control the surface temperatures.

When the surface temperature of the fuser belt or the pressure roller exceeds the preset temperature
as a result of overheating detection by each thermistor or thermopile, the forcible power OFF circuit
sends a power supply relay OFF signal as well as an overheating signal to the ASIC and the heater
lamp control circuit, and then shuts off the power supply over all the parts, except for the control panel.
If the heater lamp control circuit does not operate due to problems such as thermistor malfunction and
therefore the fuser belt or the pressure roller is abnormally heated, the pressure roller center thermostat
(THMO2), pressure roller side thermostat (THMO3) and fuser belt center thermostat (THMO4) shut off
the power supply to the IH coils and the heater lamps to protect the equipment.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 97
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C

IH board
Fuse AC input Breaker L
L Noise
N
N filter
Control circuit Coil output
IH power supply /
including CPU
drive circuit
IH coil

BreakerL
Noise
Fuser belt N
center thermopile filter

Fuser unit Fuser belt


edge thermistor Fuser unit contact / release
detection sensor

Fuser belt
Fuser belt rotation
detection sensor
Fuser belt
thermostat

Pressure roller Pressure roller


side thermostat center thermostat Switching regulator
IH coil energization permitting signal

Pressure roller
Switching signal of power setting

Sub heater lamp (for MJC,MJD) Sub heater lamp


Photocoupler power supply

drive circuit (TR1)


(for MJC,MJD)
Side heater lamp
Side heater lamp
drive circuit (TR2)
IH status signal

Center heater lamp


Center heater lamp
drive circuit (TR3)

Pressure roller Pressure roller Pressure roller


edge thermistor center thermistor side thermistor

LGC board
5VSW Temperature
control circuit

Center heater lamp control signal


Heater lamp Side heater lamp control signal
ASIC
control circuit Sub heater lamp control signal (for MJC,MJD)

Fig. 3-57

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 98
e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C

e-STUDIO5560C(NAD) Breaker L
Noise
e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C filter N
IH board (MJD/ASD/AUD/ARD/CND)
Noise
filter

Control circuit IH power supply / AC input


Fuse
including CPU drive circuit L Noise
Breaker L
N
3
N filter
Coil output

IH coil BreakerL
Noise
filter N

Fuser belt
center thermopile

Fuser unit
Fuser belt
edge thermistor Fuser unit contact / release e-STUDIO6560C/6570C(NAD)
detection sensor

Fuser belt
Fuser belt rotation
detection sensor

Fuser belt
thermostat

Pressure roller Pressure roller Switching regulator


side thermostat center thermostat
IH coil energization permitting signal
Switching signal of power setting
Photocoupler power supply

Pressure roller
Side heater lamp
Side heater lamp
drive circuit (TR2)
IH status signal

Center heater lamp


Center heater lamp
drive circuit (TR3)

Pressure roller Pressure roller Pressure roller


edge thermistor center thermistor side thermistor

LGC board
5VSW Temperature
control circuit

Center heater lamp control signal


ASIC Heater lamp
control circuit Side heater lamp control signal

Fig. 3-58

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 99
[ 1-2 ] Temperature detection section

6. Fuser unit error status counter control


• To enhance the safety of the fuser unit section, the engine CPU provides the following protection:
When a third [C411] error has occurred after two consecutive [C411] errors, the heater lamps are not
turned ON and an error [C412] is displayed immediately even if the operator turns the power OFF
and then back ON. However, if the equipment goes into the ready state normally with the fuser unit
error status counter value “1” or below, the counter is cleared to “0”.

• If any of the error codes [C411] to [C490] is displayed and still not cleared even though the power is
turned ON after the thermistor, thermopile, thermostat, heater lamps and other parts were repaired,
check the fuser unit error status counter value in the Setting Mode (08-2002) to clear the value to
“0”.

Remarks:
The fuser unit error status counter (Setting Mode (08-2002)) never has any values other than 0 to
71.

• If the does not turn ON and the service call [C411] or [C412] is displayed immediately after the
power is ON, ensure the fuser unit error status counter is “2” or over. If it is “2” or over, be sure to
check the thermistor, thermopile, thermostat and heater lamp. Reset the counter to “0” after
repairing them, then turn ON the power.

• If the fuser unit error status counter is “71” or over (e.g., 80), the data in SRAM itself may possibly
have been ruined due to causes such as leakage from the chargers.
Check the bias, high-voltage transformers and needle electrodes to see if any of them is defective,
and also look through all the data.

• When the thermistors or thermopiles detect overheating, the engine CPU decides the error code
and counter value of the fuser unit error status. After turning OFF each output (the heater lamp,
exposure lamp, control panel display, motors and so on) to protect the fuser unit, the engine CPU
shuts off the power supply over all the parts, except for the control panel.

Error code: C449, C468 ([C] and [8])


Counter value of the fuser unit error status: 8, 9, 18 to 23, 25 to 29 (08-2002)

Thermistors and thermopiles continue detecting the abnormal temperature even after the error
codes and counter values are decided. Even if the main power switch is turned ON immediately, the
power supply over all the parts, except for the control panel, is shut off when the surface
temperature of the fuser belt is still higher than the abnormal temperature detected.
Wait until the surface temperature of the fuser belt is lowered enough, and turn ON the power to
check the counter value while it is turned OFF again. After confirming that it is the fuser unit
abnormality, correct the abnormality and reset the counter value (08-2002) to “0” to start up the
equipment normally.

7. Temperature detection circuit


The thermistor is a device whose resistance varies according to the detected temperature, and the
thermopile is a device whose output voltage varies according to the detected temperature. The ASIC
detects voltages output from these devices, and judges whether the operation of the fuser unit is
normal or abnormal from the changes in voltages.
If one of the thermistors and thermopiles is broken, the control circuit judges that the temperature of the
fuser belt or pressure roller is extremely low and keeps turning the heater lamps ON. As a result, the
temperature of the fuser belt or pressure roller rises, and possibly activates the thermostat which is a
safety protection device. To prevent this in advance, the ASIC works to detect whether each thermistor
and thermopile is broken or not.
Also, the control circuit constantly checks the temperature of the heat roller and the pressure roller to
prevent them from excessive heating by circuit abnormality or thermistor abnormality, and automatically
shuts OFF the power when one of these temperatures exceeds the specified temperature.
e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 100
8. Abnormality detection by the thermistors and thermopiles
The following table shows the conditions for judging the temperature abnormality of the fuser belt and
pressure roller, and the detecting timing.

Temperature judged
Fuser belt Counter Error
Check Pressure roller Error
thermistor / (08- judging
timing thermistor code
thermopile 2002) timing
Center Edge Center Side Edge 3
Power ON 220°C --- --- --- --- C449 9 Power ON
or
above
--- 220°C --- --- ---
or
above
--- --- 220°C --- --- C468 8
or
above
--- --- --- 220°C ---
or
above
--- --- --- --- 210°C
or
above
--- --- 40°C or 150°C --- C462 62
below or
above
--- --- 150°C 40°C or ---
or below
above
Detecting 220°C --- --- --- --- C449 19 On usual
40°C or
above
--- 220°C --- --- ---
or
above
--- --- 220°C --- --- C468 18
or
above
--- --- --- 220°C ---
or
above
--- --- --- --- 210°C
or
above
40°C or --- --- --- --- C412 2 Fixed time
below (C411) (1)
--- --- 40°C or --- --- C462 62
below (C461) (61)
--- --- --- 40°C or ---
below
--- --- Difference between --- C464 70
Center and Side:
40°C or more

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 101
Temperature judged
Fuser belt Counter Error
Check Pressure roller Error
thermistor / (08- judging
timing thermistor code
thermopile 2002) timing
Center Edge Center Side Edge
Detecting 220°C --- --- --- --- C449 21 On usual
120°C or
above
--- 220°C --- --- ---
or
above
--- --- 220°C --- --- C468 20
or
above
--- --- --- 220°C ---
or
above
--- --- --- --- 210°C
or
above
120°C --- --- --- --- C446 6 Fixed time
or below (C443) (3)
--- --- Difference between --- C464 71
Center and Side:
40°C or more
When pre- 220°C --- --- --- --- C449 22 On usual
running end or
temperature above
or ready --- 220°C --- --- ---
temperature or
is detected above
--- --- 220°C --- --- C468 20
or
above
--- --- --- 220°C ---
or
above
--- --- --- --- 210°C
or
above
Ready --- --- --- --- C446 6 Fixed time
tempera (C445) (5)
ture or
less

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 102
Temperature judged
Fuser belt Counter Error
Check Pressure roller Error
thermistor / (08- judging
timing thermistor code
thermopile 2002) timing
Center Edge Center Side Edge
During 220°C --- --- --- --- C449 23 On usual
ready or
above
--- 220°C --- --- --- 3
or
above
--- --- 220°C --- --- C468 26
or
above
--- --- --- 220°C ---
or
above
--- --- --- --- 210°C
or
above
40°C or --- --- --- --- C447 7
below
--- 40°C or --- --- ---
below
--- --- 40°C or --- --- C467 33
below
--- --- --- 40°C or ---
below
--- --- --- --- 40°C or
below
If 600 W of IH --- --- --- C448 32 Fixed time
power is continued
for longer than 20
sec. when the
pressure roller
center thermistor is
150°C or more

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 103
Temperature judged
Fuser belt Counter Error
Check Pressure roller Error
thermistor / (08- judging
timing thermistor code
thermopile 2002) timing
Center Edge Center Side Edge
During 220°C --- --- --- --- C449 25 On usual
printing or
above
--- 220°C --- --- ---
or
above
--- --- 220°C --- --- C468 26
or
above
--- --- --- 220°C ---
or
above
--- --- --- --- 210°C
or
above
40°C or --- --- --- --- C447 24
below
--- 40°C or --- --- ---
below
--- --- 40°C or --- --- C467 34
below
--- --- --- 40°C or ---
below
--- --- --- --- 40°C or
below
At energy 220°C --- --- --- --- C449 27 On usual
saving or
mode above
--- 220°C --- --- ---
or
above
--- --- 220°C --- --- C468 26
or
above
--- --- --- 220°C ---
or
above
--- --- --- --- 210°C
or
above
At paper 220°C --- --- --- --- C449 29 On usual
jam or
above
--- 220°C --- --- ---
or
above
--- --- 220°C --- --- C468 28
or
above
--- --- --- 220°C ---
or
above
--- --- --- --- 210°C
or
above

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 104
* The figures in the “Error code” and “Counter” fields with parentheses denote that an error status has
not yet been determined (= error status is detected only once).

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 105
3.16 Exit / Reverse / Duplex Section

3.16.1 General Description


In the paper exit section paper transported from the bridge unit is transported to the upper exit tray or
the lower exit tray. The bridge unit transports paper transported from the fuser unit to the paper exit
section. For duplex printing, the bridge unit makes paper switchbacked to the duplexing unit. The
duplexing unit reverses paper for duplex printing. When printing on one side of paper is finished, the
paper is transported from the bridge unit to the duplexing unit, and then the duplexing unit reverses and
transports the paper to the registration roller with the other side up.

• Paper exit unit

Reverse section stationary Upper exit section


jam detection sensor cooling fan-1/2
Reverse path cover switch Exit motor

Upper paper exit sensor

Lower exit section Upper exit tray


cooling fan-1/2 paper full detection sensor

Upper paper exit roller


Lower paper exit sensor

Lower paper exit roller

Lower exit section


cooling fan-3

Fig. 3-59

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 106
• Bridge unit
Reverse section stationary jam detection sensor Reverse sensor

Exit paper cooling fan (front) Bridge unit cooling fan (rear)
Bridge unit exit roller-1
Bridge unit connecting Reverse roller
Bridge unit cooling fan (front)
detection switch Bridge unit
transport exit
motor 3
Front cover
opening/closing
detection switch

Bridge unit path


exit sensor

Bridge unit exit roller-2 Interlock switch


Bridge unit transport roller-3
Transport path Bridge unit transport roller-1
switching solenoid-2 Reverse motor
Bridge unit transport entrance motor
Bridge unit path entrance sensor

Transport path switching solenoid-1 Bridge unit transport roller-2


Fig. 3-60

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 107
• Duplexing bridge unit / Duplexing unit

Reverse path sensor Reversed paper cooling fan

ADU transport roller-1


Duplexing bridge
transport roller

Duplexing unit ADU motor-1


opening/closing
detection sensor Duplexing unit
cover opening/closing
Fuser transport sensor
ADU motor-2 detection sensor

ADU board
Duplexing unit path entrance sensor

ADU transport roller-2

Duplexing unit path exit sensor ADU transport roller-3

Duplexing unit interlock switch

Fig. 3-61

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 108
3.16.2 Composition

Paper exit unit Upper paper exit sensor (S61)


Upper exit tray paper full detection sensor (S62)
Lower paper exit sensor (S63)
Reverse section stationary jam detection sensor (S60)
Reverse path cover switch (SW5)
Upper paper exit roller 3
Lower paper exit roller
Upper exit section cooling fan-1 (F32)
Upper exit section cooling fan-2 (F33)
Lower exit section cooling fan-1 (F34)
Lower exit section cooling fan-2 (F35)
Lower exit section cooling fan-3 (F36)
Exit motor (M2)
Bridge unit Bridge unit path entrance sensor (S55)
Bridge unit path exit sensor (S56)
Reverse section stationary jam detection sensor (S58)
Reverse sensor (S59)
Interlock switch (SW2)
Bridge unit connecting detection switch (SW8)
Front cover opening/ closing detection switch (SW9)
Transport path switching solenoid-1 (SOL1)
Transport path switching solenoid-2 (SOL2)
Exit paper cooling fan (front) (F5)
Bridge unit cooling fan (front) (F6)
Bridge unit cooling fan (rear) (F7)
Bridge unit transport roller-1
Bridge unit transport roller-2
Bridge unit transport roller-3
Reverse roller
Bridge unit exit roller-1
Bridge unit exit roller-2
Bridge unit transport entrance motor (M4)
Bridge unit transport exit motor (M5)
Reverse motor (M3)
Duplexing bridge unit Duplexing unit opening/ closing detection sensor (S64)
Reverse path sensor (S57)
Duplexing bridge transport roller
Duplexing unit Duplexing unit path entrance sensor (S66)
Duplexing unit path exit sensor (S67)
Duplexing unit interlock switch (SW4)
Duplexing unit cover opening/ closing detection sensor (SW7)
ADU board (ADU)
Reversed paper cooling fan (F11)
ADU transport roller-1
ADU transport roller-2
ADU transport roller-3
ADU motor-1 (M7)
ADU motor-2 (M8)
Fuser transport sensor (S65)

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 109
3.16.3 Description of Operations
Paper brought from the fuser unit to the bridge unit is then transported to either the upper or lower exit
tray of the paper exit unit by means of bridge unit transport rollers-1, -2 and -3, and bridge unit exit
rollers-1 and -2. To transport paper to the upper exit tray, transport path switching solenoids-1 (SOL1)
and -2 (SOL2) are turned ON in order to lower flappers-1 and -2. To transport it to the lower exit tray,
only transport path switching solenoid-1 (SOL1) is turned OFF in order not to lower flapper-1. The
paper transported from the bridge unit to the paper exit unit is then made to exit by the upper or lower
exit roller.

When the duplex printing mode is selected, first the print data of the back side of the original are printed
on the back side of the fed paper, and then the printed paper is transported from the fuser unit to the
bridge unit. At this time transport path switching solenoid-1 (SOL1) is turned ON in order to lower
flapper-1, and transport path switching solenoid-2 (SOL2) is turned OFF in order not to lower flapper-2,
so that the paper will be transported to the reverse path section. When the reverse sensor (S59) of the
bridge unit detects the trailing edge of the paper, the reverse roller is driven to switch back the paper to
the duplexing unit via the duplexing bridge unit. Then the print data of the front side of the original are
printed on the front side of the paper that was transported from the duplexing unit to the registration
section. After printing on the both sides of the paper is completed, the paper is made to exit by the
bridge unit and the paper exit unit.

Paper jams on the upper transport path are detected by means of the reverse sensor (S59) of the
bridge unit and the upper paper exit sensor (S61) of the paper exit unit. Paper jams on the lower
transport path are detected by means of the bridge unit path entrance sensor (S55), bridge unit path
exit sensor (S56) and lower paper exit sensor (S63). Paper jams on the reverse path are detected by
means of the reverse path sensor (S57). The reverse section stationary jam detection sensor (S58) of
the bridge unit and another reverse section stationary jam detection sensor (S60) of the paper exit unit
detect where the jammed paper lies on the reverse path.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 110
[ 1 ] Paper transport paths
1. Upper exit section

1
3

Fig. 3-62

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 111
2. Lower exit section

Fig. 3-63

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 112
3.17 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)

3.17.1 General Description


The Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) transports original sheets to the RADF original
glass and then to the original exit tray after they have been scanned. In scanning double-sided
originals, the original is reversed in the exit paper path exclusive to original reversing after the back side
has been scanned and then it exits. Therefore the next original can be scanned without waiting for the
previous one to exit. 3

25 9 30 13 8 24 22, 23 21 6 7 19 5 29 31 34 33 18 1 17

26 10 4 11 20 27 14 15 12 28 3 16 2 32 35

Fig. 3-64

No. Name No. Name


1 Original tray 19 Original empty sensor (SR3)
2 Original exit tray 20 Original reading end sensor (SR4)
3 Original glass 21 Original registration sensor (SR5)
4 RADF original glass 22 Original width detection sensor-1 (SR6)
5 Pickup roller 23 Original width detection sensor-2 (SR7)
6 Feed roller 24 Original width detection sensor-3 (SR8)
7 Separation roller 25 Original intermediate transport sensor (SR9)
8 Original registration roller 26 Original reading start sensor (SR10)
9 Intermediate transport roller 27 Original exit/reverse sensor (SR11)
10 Reading start roller 28 Original exit sensor (SR12)
11 Reading end roller 29 Original jam access cover opening/closing sensor (SR13)
12 Reverse roller 30 Original reverse unit opening/closing sensor (SR14)
13 Reverse registration roller 31 Jam access cover opening/closing switch (SWR1)
14 Exit intermediate roller 32 RADF opening/closing switch (SWR2)
15 Exit/reverse roller 33 Reverse paper path
16 Exit roller 34 Exit paper path
17 Original tray sensor (SR1) 35 RADF opening/closing sensor (SR15)
18 Original tray width sensor (SR2)

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 113
3.17.2 Functions
1. Pickup roller
This roller pulls out the original on the original tray and transports it to the feed roller.

2. Feed roller
This roller is placed against the separation roller. It transports the original sent by the pickup roller.

3. Separation roller
This roller is placed against the feed roller. When two originals or more are transported from the
pickup roller, the load of the torque limiter of the separation roller is heavier than the frictional force
between the sheets. As a result, the separation roller is stopped and the lower paper is not
advanced any further.

4. Registration roller
This roller aligns the sheets sent by the transport roller.

5. Intermediate transport roller / Reading start roller


These rollers transport the original to the RADF original glass.

6. Reading end roller


This roller transports the original scanned at the RADF original glass to the reverse paper path or
the exit paper path.

7. Reverse roller
This roller switches back the original during duplex scanning.

8. Reverse registration roller


This roller aligns the original switched back by the reverse roller and transports it to the intermediate
transport roller.

9. Exit intermediate roller


This roller transports the original sent from the reading end roller to the exit path and switches it
back.

10.Exit/reverse roller
This roller transports the original reversed in the exit path to the exit roller.

11. Exit roller


This roller transports the original to the original exit tray.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 114
3.17.3 Description of Operation

[ 1 ] Drive
4 stepping motors are used for driving the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder. Each motor rotates
in order to drive the roller.
Read motor Original feed motor
Original registration roller
Feed roller Pickup roller 3

Reverse registration roller


Separation roller
Intermediate transport
roller

Exit roller

Exit/reverse roller
Reading start roller
Reading end roller Exit intermediate roller

Reverse roller Original exit motor

Original reverse motor


Fig. 3-65

Motor Rotation Roller Remarks


Original feed motor (MR1) Normal rotation Pickup roller Feeding
Feed roller
Reverse rotation Registration roller
Read motor (MR2) Normal rotation Intermediate transport
roller
Reading start roller
Reading end roller
Reverse registration roller
Original reverse motor (MR3) Normal rotation /
Reverse roller
Reverse rotation
Original exit motor (MR4) Normal rotation / Normal rotation: Front side
Exit intermediate roller
Reverse rotation exiting
Exit/reverse roller
Reverse rotation: Backside
Exit roller
exiting

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 115
[ 2 ] Original size detection
The original tray width sensor, original registration sensor, and original width detection sensors-1, -2
and -3 work in combination to detect the size of originals.

[ 2-1 ] Outline
When an original is placed on the original tray, the width of the original is detected by the positions of
the original width guides. Then the original width sensors -1 and -2 and the original length detection
sensor detect the size of the original being transported. Based on the detection result of these sensors,
the size of the original is finally determined.

[ 2-2 ] Original tray width sensor


The original tray width sensor detects the width of an original placed on the original tray.
It is detected by the brush attached to the rack moving on the original tray width sensor, which is a
board with the different length of the patterns written.
This brush is moved as the original width guide is moved. Signals (TWID0S, TWID1S, TWID2S) are
opened and shorted to SG by this movement.
The combination of these short (= low level) and open (= high level) can determine the width of the
original.
Sizes detectable in combination of these open and short of the signals are as follows:

Original width size Original width size


TWID2S TWID1S TWID0S
(LT series) (A4 series)
H H L - B5-R
H L H ST-R A5-R
H L L LD / LT A3 / A4
L H L 8.5x8.5 / LT-R / LG / 13”LG A4-R / FOLIO
L L L COMPUTER B4 / B5
H (= high level): Open L (= low level): Short

[ 2-3 ] Original width detection sensors-1, -2 and -3 / Original registration sensor


The size of the original is determined by the detection performed in combination of the original width
detection sensors-1, -2 and -3 and the original registration sensor, as well as the detection performed
by the original tray width sensor.
Sizes detectable in combination of these sensors are as follows:

A4series: (08-9000: 0 or 2)
Original Original Original
Original
Original tray Original tray width width width Size
registration
width sensor sensor detection detection detection determined
sensor
sensor-1 sensor-2 sensor-3
- - ON ON ON A3
- - ON ON OFF LD
B5/B4 - B4
ON
-A4-R/FOLIO ON ON OFF OFF FOLIO
OFF A4-R
- - OFF OFF OFF B5-R
- - ON ON ON A4
- - ON ON OFF LT
OFF
- - ON OFF OFF B5
- - OFF OFF OFF A5-R

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 116
A4 series (width sizes mixed at A3 / A4 standard)
Original Original Original
Original
Original tray Original tray width width width Size
registration
width sensor sensor detection detection detection determined
sensor
sensor-1 sensor-2 sensor-3
- ON ON - A3
- ON ON OFF - B4
A3/A4 - OFF OFF - A4-R/FOLIO
- ON ON - A4 3
OFF
- ON OFF - B5

A4 series (width sizes mixed at B4 / B5 standard)


Original Original Original
Original
Original tray Original tray width width width Size
registration
width sensor sensor detection detection detection determined
sensor
sensor-1 sensor-2 sensor-3
- ON OFF - B4
ON
- OFF OFF - A4-R/FOLIO
B4/B5
- ON OFF - B5
OFF
- OFF OFF - A5-R

A4 series (width sizes mixed at A4-R standard)


Original Original Original
Original
Original tray Original tray width width width Size
registration
width sensor sensor detection detection detection determined
sensor
sensor-1 sensor-2 sensor-3
- ON OFF - A4-R/FOLIO
ON
A4-R - OFF OFF - B5-R
- OFF OFF OFF - A5-R

A4 series (width sizes mixed at B5-R standard)


Original Original Original
Original
Original tray Original tray width width width Size
registration
width sensor sensor detection detection detection determined
sensor
sensor-1 sensor-2 sensor-3
- ON OFF OFF - B5-R
B5-R
- OFF OFF OFF - A5-R

LT series (08-9000:1)
Original Original Original
Original
Original tray Original tray width width width Size
registration
width sensor sensor detection detection detection determined
sensor
sensor-1 sensor-2 sensor-3
- - ON ON ON A3
- - ON ON OFF LD
COMP - ON COMP
- ON ON OFF OFF LG
LT-R/LG OFF LT-R
- - ON ON ON A4
- - ON ON OFF LT
OFF
- - ON OFF OFF 8.5x8.5
- - OFF OFF OFF ST-R

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 117
LT series (width sizes mixed at LD / LT standard)
Original Original Original
Original
Original tray Original tray width width width Size
registration
width sensor sensor detection detection detection determined
sensor
sensor-1 sensor-2 sensor-3
- ON ON - LD
- ON ON OFF - COMP
LD/LT
- OFF OFF - LT-R/LG
- OFF ON ON - LT

LT series (width sizes mixed at COMP standard)


Original Original Original
Original
Original tray Original tray width width width Size
registration
width sensor sensor detection detection detection determined
sensor
sensor-1 sensor-2 sensor-3
- ON OFF - COMP
ON
COMP - OFF OFF - LT-R/LG
- OFF OFF OFF - ST-R

LT series (width sizes mixed at LG / LT-R standard)


Original Original Original
Original
Original tray Original tray width width width Size
registration
width sensor sensor detection detection detection determined
sensor
sensor-1 sensor-2 sensor-3
- ON ON OFF - LT-R/LG
LG/LT-R - ON OFF - 8.5x8.5
OFF
- OFF OFF - ST-R

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 118
3.18 Power Supply Unit

3.18.1 General Description


The power supply unit consists of the AC filter, insulation type DC output circuits and heater lamp
control circuit.
Notes:
In a model with 2 power cables, the total current capacity to be used should not exceed the
breaker rating. 3

3.18.2 Composition

[ 1 ] Description of Operations
1. AC filter
Eliminates noise from the outside and prevents the noise generated by the equipment from leaking
to the outside.

2. DC output circuits
Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part. The DC
voltage is divided into the following two lines.

a. Main power switch line:Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process.
Two kinds of voltage (+5.1 V and +12V) are output when the main power
switch of the equipment is turned ON.

b. Cover switch line: Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process,
being supplied via the cover switch. Two kinds of voltage (+5.1VD and
+24VD) are output only when the main power switch of the equipment is
turned ON and two covers (front cover and automatic duplexing unit) are
closed.

3. Heater lamp control circuit


TRC (Triac) is driven by the control signal from the LGC board and then AC power is supplied to
each heater lamp in the pressure roller.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 119
3.18.3 Operation of DC Output Circuits
1. Starting operation of the equipment
When the main power switch of the equipment is turned ON, power starts supplying to all the lines
only when two doors (front cover and ADU) are closed

2. Stopping line output


When the main power switch of the equipment is turned OFF, PWR-DN signal is output after the
instantaneous outage insurance time elapses and then the supply of each voltage stops. If the
supply of voltage of the main line (+5VS, +5VA, +12VA) stops earlier than the 24V line does, it may
cause the damage of the electron device on each control circuit. To prevent this, the supply of these
voltages stops after the PWR-DN signal is output and the minimum retaining time elapses.

3. Output protection
Each output system includes an overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits (a fuse and internal
protection circuit). This is to prevent the defectives (damage or abnormal operation of the secondary
circuit) which may be caused by an overcurrent due to a short circuit or an overvoltage due to a
short circuit between different voltages. If the protection circuit is activated (except the case the fuse
is blown out), remove the causes such as short-circuit. Turn ON the power again to clear the
overcurrent protection.

4. Recovering from super sleep mode (normal starting))


When the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel is pressed during the super sleep mode, a super
sleep mode shifting/recovering signal (SYS-EN) is output from the SYS board and then voltage
starts being supplied to all the lines, if no error was detected.

5. Shifting to super sleep mode (normal stopping)


When the [ON/OFF] button on the control panel is pressed for 1 second or more while the main
power switch of the equipment is toggled ON, a super sleep mode shifting/recovering signal (SYS-
EN) is output from the SYS board after the initialization is finished and then all lines for output
voltage except +5VS are closed.

The Super sleep mode is disabled under the following conditions.

- When the Super sleep mode is set to be disabled on the control panel, TopAccess and with the
code 08-8543

- When the Wireless LAN Module, Bluetooth Module, e-BRIDGE ID Gate or Data Overwrite
Enabler is installed, or when the IPsec Enabler is installed and its function is set to be enabled

- When operation is being performed in the self-diagnosis mode (Disabled until the main power
switch is turned OFF)

6. State of the power supply


- Power OFF
The main power switch of the equipment is turned OFF. Since DC voltage is not supplied to each
board, the equipment is not operable.

- Normal state (including Energy saving mode)


The main power switch of the equipment is turned ON and DC voltage is supplied to each board.
When the cover of the equipment is closed, 24V DC voltage is supplied and the equipment
enters into the ready/printing state.

- Sleep mode
Since +5VB, +5VD, +12VB and +24V DC voltages are not supplied but +12VA, +5VA and +5VS
DC voltages only, the equipment does not enter into the ready state.

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 120
- Super Sleep mode
Only DC voltage and +5VS are output from the power supply unit. The [ON/OFF] button is
monitored and the LED of the main power switch is lit.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 121
3.18.4 Output Channel
The following are 2 output channels for the main power switch line.

1. +5.1 V
+5.1VS: CN402 Pin 7, Pin 8
Output to the SYS board
+5.1VA: CN402 Pins 12, 13 and 14
Output to the SYS board
+5.1VB: CN402 Pins 20
Output to the SYS board
+5.1VB: CN403 Pins 2 and 3
Output to the IMG board
+5.1VB: CN404 Pin 1
Output to the LGC, PFP/LCF (via LGC board)
+5.1VB: CN405 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board
+5.1VB: CN406 Pin 4
Output to the Finisher
+5.1VB: CN407 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the SLG board and RADF

2. +12 V
+12VA: CN402 Pins 17 and 18
Output to the SYS board
+12VB: CN402 Pin 18
Output to the SYS board
+12VB: CN404 Pin 7
Output to the LGC board
+12VB: CN407 Pin 14
Output to the SLG board

The following are 2 output channels for the cover switch line.
1. +5.1 V
+5.1VD: CN405 Pin 4
Output to the LGC board

2. +24 V
+24VD1: CN405 Pin 5
Output to the LGC board
+24VD2: CN405 Pin 6
Output to the LGC board, PFC board (via LGC board),
high-voltage transformer (via LGC board)
+24VD3: CN405 Pins 7
Output to the PFC board (via LGC board)
+24VD4: CN406 Pin 2
Output to the Finisher
+24VD5: CN407 Pins 9, 10, 11 and 12
Output to the SLG board, RADF

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 122
Output voltage by the type of connector

Main power switch line


Connector Destination Voltage
CN402 For the SYS board +5.1VA, +5.1VB, +5.1VS, +12VA
CN403 For the IMG board +5.1VB
CN404 For the LGC board, LCF (Option: via LGC +5.1VB, +12VB
board)
CN405 For the LGC board +5.1VB 3
CN406 For the Finisher (Option) +5.1VB
CN407 For the SLG board, RADF +5.1V, +12VB

Cover switch line


Connector Destination Voltage
CN405 For the LGC board, LCF (Option: via LGC +5.1VD, +24VD1, +24VD2, +24VD3
board),
CN406 For the Finisher (Option) +24VD4
CN407 For the SLG, RADF +24VD5

AC line
Connector Destination Voltage
CN401 AC input -
CN408 Heater lamp Lamp output

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 123
3.18.5 Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormality with each part
using the following table.

Voltage Board/Unit Part Fuse type


+24VD1 LGC board Fuser motor M6 F201:
2nd transfer cam motor M48 8 A (Semi time-lag)
Transfer belt cam motor M14
Toner motor-K M15
Toner motor-C M16
Toner motor-M M17
Toner motor-Y M18
Drum motor-K M27
Drum motor-YMC M28
Developer unit motor-K M29
Developer unit mixer motor-K M30
Developer unit motor-YMC M31
Developer unit mixer motor-YMC M32
Pressure roller contact/release clutch CLT1
Discharge LED-Y ERS-Y
Discharge LED-M ERS-M
Discharge LED-C ERS-C
Discharge LED-K ERS-K
Key copy counter, copy key card, coin
controller

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 124
Voltage Board/Unit Part Fuse type
+24VD2 LGC board Sub-hopper toner motor-K M19 F202:
Sub-hopper toner motor-C M20 8 A (Semi time-lag)
Sub-hopper toner motor-M M21
Sub-hopper toner motor-Y M22
Needle electrode cleaner motor-K M23
Needle electrode cleaner motor-C M24
Needle electrode cleaner motor-M M25 3
Needle electrode cleaner motor-Y M26
Waste toner transport motor M33
Polygonal motor M34
Mirror motor-M M35
Mirror motor-C M36
Mirror motor-K M37
Shutter motor M38
Auto-toner sensor-K S26
Auto-toner sensor-C S27
Auto-toner sensor-M S28
Auto-toner sensor-Y S29
Drum surface potential (V0) sensor-K S34
(e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only)
Image quality shutter solenoid SOL3
V0 sensor shutter solenoid-K SOL4
(e-STUDIO6550C/6570C only)
IH board cooling fan-1 F8
IH board cooling fan-2 F9
EPU cooling fan F14
Toner cartridge heat insulation fan F21
Laser optical unit cooling fan (Front) F22
Laser optical unit cooling fan (Rear) F23
Ozone suctioning fan F24
Scattered toner suctioning fan F25
Toner cooling exhaust fan F31
Lower exit section cooling fan-3 F36
High-voltage transformer-1 HVT1
High-voltage transformer-2 HVT2
PFC board Tray-up motor-1 M44
3rd drawer transport clutch CLT4
3rd drawer feed clutch CLT5
4th drawer transport clutch CLT6
4th drawer feed clutch CLT7
Bridge unit cooling fan (rear) F7
Exit paper cooling fan (rear) F15
Upper exhaust fan (left) F29
Upper exhaust fan (right) F30
Tandem LCF solenoid SOL9
Stopper opening/closing solenoid SOL10
(front)
Stopper opening/closing solenoid SOL11
(rear)

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 125
Voltage Board/Unit Part Fuse type
+24VD3 PFC board Exit motor M2 F203:
Reverse motor M3 8 A (Semi time-lag)
Bridge unit transport entrance motor M4
Bridge unit transport exit motor M5
ADU motor-1 M7
ADU motor-2 M8
TRU waste toner motor M10
TRU waste toner transport motor M11
Bypass motor M12
Transfer belt motor M13
Registration motor M39
Transport motor-1 M40
Transport motor-2 M41
Feed motor M42
Feed/transport motor M43
Tray-up motor-2 M45
Tandem LCF tray-up motor M46
Tandem LCF end fence motor M47
Transport path switching solenoid-1 SOL1
Transport path switching solenoid-2 SOL2
Bypass pickup solenoid SOL8
Exit paper cooling fan (front) F5
Bridge unit cooling fan (front) F6
Reversed paper cooling fan F11
Upper exit section cooling fan-1 F32
Upper exit section cooling fan-2 F33
Lower exit section cooling fan-1 F34
Lower exit section cooling fan-2 F35
+24VD4 Finisher F204:
8 A (Semi time-lag)
+24VD5 SLG board F205:
RADF 8 A (Semi time-lag)
+5VB LGC board F210:
5 A (Semi time-lag)
+5VS SYS board, F211:
Control panel 2.5 A (PolySwitch)

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 126
4. DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT

4.1 Disassembly and Replacement of Covers

4.1.1 Front lower cover

(1) Pull out the 1st drawer.


(2) Loosen 2 screws.
(3) Take off the front lower cover.
4

Fig. 4-1

4.1.2 Front cover

(1) Take off the front lower cover.


P. 4-1"4.1.1 Front lower cover"
(2) Open the front cover.
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the cover
support.
(4) Remove 1 clip.
(5) Lift up the supporting point of the left side
hinge and move the front cover to the right
side to take it off.

Fig. 4-2

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4-1
4.1.3 Top right cover

(1) Remove 3 screws and take off the top right


cover.

Fig. 4-3

4.1.4 Right top cover

(1) Take off the top right cover.


P. 4-2"4.1.3 Top right cover"
(2) Open the duplexing unit.
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the right top
cover.

Fig. 4-4

4.1.5 Top front cover

(1) Take off the right top cover.


P. 4-2"4.1.4 Right top cover"
(2) Open the front cover.
(3) Remove 3 screws and take off the top front
cover.

Fig. 4-5

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4-2
4.1.6 Top left cover

(1) Remove 2 screws and take off the filter cover


and top left cover.

Fig. 4-6

4.1.7 FAX cover

(1) Remove 1 screw and take off the FAX cover.


Notes:
When the optional FAX Unit (GD-1270) has
been installed, take off the modular cable
cover before the FAX cover.

Fig. 4-7

4.1.8 Receiving tray

(1) Take off the top front cover.


P. 4-2"4.1.5 Top front cover"
(2) Take off the top left cover.
P. 4-3"4.1.6 Top left cover"
(3) Take off the FAX cover.
P. 4-3"4.1.7 FAX cover"
(4) Open the reverse path cover.
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the receiving
tray.

Fig. 4-8

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4-3
4.1.9 Left middle cover

(1) Take off the rear cover.


P. 4-7"4.1.18 Rear cover"
(2) Remove 1 shield seal.
(3) Remove 3 screws to take off the left middle
cover.

• When installing the left middle cover, be


sure to attach the shield seal back in its
original position.

Shield seal

Fig. 4-9

4.1.10 Left top cover

(1) Take off the receiving tray.


P. 4-3"4.1.8 Receiving tray"
Fan cover
(2) Take off the left middle cover.
P. 4-4"4.1.9 Left middle cover"
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the fan cover.
(4) Remove 6 screws and take off the left top
cover.

Fig. 4-10

4.1.11 Left lower cover

(1) Remove 2 screws and take off the filter


cover.
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the left lower
cover. Filter cover

Fig. 4-11

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4-4
4.1.12 Bypass tray unit (Removing tray arm)

(1) Secure the sliding section of the tray arm,


and then remove the tray arm by pulling its
Joint
joint up.
The tray can be easily taken out by lifting up
its leading edge with the sliding section
secured.

Secure here
4
Tray arm

Fig. 4-12

4.1.13 Duplexing unit front cover

(1) Open the duplexing unit.


(2) Remove the tray arms.
P. 4-5"4.1.12 Bypass tray unit (Removing
tray arm)"
(3) Remove 3 screws and take off the duplexing
unit front cover.

Fig. 4-13

4.1.14 Duplexing unit rear cover

(1) Open the duplexing unit.


(2) Remove the tray arms.
P. 4-5"4.1.12 Bypass tray unit (Removing
tray arm)"
(3) Remove 3 screws and take off the duplexing
unit rear cover.

Fig. 4-14

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4-5
4.1.15 Paper feed cover

(1) Open the duplexing unit.


(2) Open the paper feed cover.
(3) Remove 1 clip to take off the paper feed
cover.

Fig. 4-15

4.1.16 RADF connector cover

(1) Remove 1 screw and take off the RADF


connector cover.

Fig. 4-16

4.1.17 Right rear cover

(1) Take off the right top cover.


P. 4-2"4.1.4 Right top cover"
(2) Take off the RADF connector cover.
P. 4-6"4.1.16 RADF connector cover"
(3) Take off the LAN cable cover.
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the filter cover.
(5) Remove 3 screws and take off the right rear
cover.

Filter cover

LAN cable cover


Fig. 4-17

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4-6
4.1.18 Rear cover

(1) Remove 10 screws and take off the rear


cover.

Fig. 4-18

4.1.19 Upper exhaust fan cover

(1) Remove 1 screw and take off the upper


exhaust fan cover.

Fig. 4-19

4.1.20 Top rear cover

(1) Take off the RADF.


P. 4-256"4.11.1 RADF"
(2) Take off the top left cover.
P. 4-3"4.1.6 Top left cover"
(3) Take off the upper exhaust fan cover.
P. 4-7"4.1.19 Upper exhaust fan cover"
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the top rear
cover.

Fig. 4-20

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4-7
4.1.21 Left corner cover

(1) Take off the top right cover.


P. 4-2"4.1.3 Top right cover"
(2) Pull out all the drawers.
(3) Open the front cover.
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the left corner
cover.

Fig. 4-21

4.1.22 Right corner cover

(1) Pull out all the drawers.


(2) Take off the front lower cover.
P. 4-1"4.1.1 Front lower cover"
(3) Open the front cover.
(4) Take off the right top cover.
P. 4-2"4.1.4 Right top cover"
(5) Open the paper feed cover.
(6) Remove 2 screws and take off the right
corner cover.

Fig. 4-22

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4-8
4.2 Control Panel

4.2.1 Control panel unit

(1) Release 4 latches and then take off the


control panel hinge cover. Control panel
hinge cover
Latch

Latch
Fig. 4-23
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and release 1 clamp.

2
1

Fig. 4-24
(3) Remove 4 screws.
(4) Take off the control panel unit by lifting it up.

Control panel unit


Fig. 4-25

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4-9
4.2.2 Control panel rear cover

(1) Take off the control panel unit.


P. 4-9"4.2.1 Control panel unit"
(2) Remove 8 screws and then take off the
control panel rear cover.

Control panel
rear cover
Fig. 4-26

4.2.3 Display PC board (DSP)

(1) Take off the control panel rear cover.


P. 4-10"4.2.2 Control panel rear cover"
(2) Disconnect 4 connectors.

Fig. 4-27
(3) Remove 4 screws and then take off the
display PC board. Display PC board

Fig. 4-28

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 10
4.2.4 Shielding plate

(1) Disconnect 4 connectors.

Fig. 4-29
(2) Release the harness from 1 harness clamp.

Fig. 4-30
(3) Remove 5 screws.

Fig. 4-31

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 11
(4) Remove 9 screws.

Fig. 4-32
(5) Release the harness clamp from 1 harness
clamp and take off the shielding bracket.
Shield bracket

Fig. 4-33

Notes:
When installing the shield bracket, pass the
harness through its hole. Shield bracket

Fig. 4-34

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 12
4.2.5 Key PC board-1 (KEY1)

(1) Take off the shielding plate.


P. 4-11"4.2.4 Shielding plate" Sheet
(2) Remove a sheet.
(3) Remove 9 screws and then take off the key
PC board-1.

Key PC board-1

Fig. 4-35

4.2.6 Key PC board-2 (KEY2)

(1) Take off the shielding plate.


P. 4-11"4.2.4 Shielding plate" Sheet
(2) Remove a sheet.
(3) Remove 6 screws and then take off the key
PC board-2.
Key PC board-2

Fig. 4-36

4.2.7 Touch panel (TCP)

(1) Take off the shielding plate.


P. 4-11"4.2.4 Shielding plate"
(2) Remove 4 screws and then take off the touch Touch panel
panel.

Fig. 4-37

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 13
4.2.8 Control panel cover

(1) Release 4 latches and then take off the


control panel cover.

latch

Control panel cover


Fig. 4-38

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 14
4.3 Scanner

4.3.1 Original glass

(1) Open the RADF.


(2) Take off the top front cover.
P. 4-2"4.1.5 Top front cover"
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket.
Bracket
4

Fig. 4-39
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the fixing
bracket.

Fixing bracket

Fig. 4-40
(5) Take off the original glass.
Notes:
When installing, fit 2 small protrusions of the
original glass in the groove of the equipment
and fix the original glass with the fixing
bracket by pushing it to the left rear direction.

Fig. 4-41

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 15
4.3.2 Lens cover

(1) Take off the original glass.


P. 4-15"4.3.1 Original glass"
(2) Release 1 clamp and disconnect 1
connector.

Clamp

Fig. 4-42
(3) Remove 5 screws and take off the lens
cover.
Lens cover

Fig. 4-43

4.3.3 SLG board cooling fan (F1)

(1) Take off the lens cover.


P. 4-16"4.3.2 Lens cover"
SLG board cooling fan
(2) Remove 2 screws and disconnect 1
connector.
(3) Take off the SLG board cooling fan.

Fig. 4-44

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 16
4.3.4 Automatic original detection sensor <APS sensor> (S1-5)

[A] A4 series (APS-1, -2, -3, -C, -R)

(1) Take off the original glass.


P. 4-15"4.3.1 Original glass"
(2) Take off the lens cover.
P. 4-16"4.3.2 Lens cover"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw and
take off the APS sensor.
4

Fig. 4-45
(4) Disconnect 1 connector each, release 2
latches each and take off 4 APS sensors.

Latch

Fig. 4-46

[B] LT series (APS-2, -3, -C, -R)

(1) Take off the original glass.


P. 4-15"4.3.1 Original glass"
(2) Take off the lens cover.
P. 4-16"4.3.2 Lens cover"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw and
take off the APS sensor.

Fig. 4-47

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 17
(4) Disconnect 1 connector each, release 2
latches each and take off 3 APS sensors.

Latch

Fig. 4-48

4.3.5 Exposure lamp (EXP)

(1) Take off the original glass.


P. 4-15"4.3.1 Original glass"
(2) Take off the top front cover.
P. 4-2"4.1.5 Top front cover"
(3) Move the carriage-1 to the center position.

Fig. 4-49

Notes:
Rotate the drive pulley to move the carriage.

Drive pulley

Fig. 4-50

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 18
(4) Disconnect the connector of the exposure
lamp.
Notes:
When disconnecting the connector, pay
attention not to give load to the carriage
frame.
(5) Release the harness from the harness
clamp.

Fig. 4-51
(6) Move the carriage-1 to the position where
the side of the frame is cut out.

Fig. 4-52
(7) Remove 1 screw.
(8) Lift up the front side of the exposure lamp Exposure lamp
and take off by sliding it.

Fig. 4-53

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 19
4.3.6 Exposure lamp cooling fan-1 (F2)

(1) Open the RADF.


(2) Take off the original glass.
P. 4-15"4.3.1 Original glass"
(3) Move the carriage-1 to the right side.

Fig. 4-54

Notes:
Rotate the drive pulley to move the carriage.

Drive pulley

Fig. 4-55
(4) Disconnect 1 connector.
(5) Remove 3 screws, and take off the Exposure Exposure lamp cooling fan-1
lamp cooling fan-1.
Notes:
When installing the fan, do not tighten the
screw too much.

Fig. 4-56

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 20
4.3.7 Scanner unit cooling fan-1 (F3)

(1) Take off the top rear cover.


P. 4-7"4.1.20 Top rear cover"
(2) Remove 3 screws and take off the duct Duct cover
cover.

Fig. 4-57
(3) Lift the duct.
Duct

Fig. 4-58

Notes:
Pass the cable through cutout of the duct to
install it in the equipment. Duct

Fig. 4-59

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 21
(4) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the
Scanner unit
scanner unit cooling fan-1.
cooling fan-1

Fig. 4-60

4.3.8 Exposure lamp cooling fan-2 (F26)

(1) Open the RADF.


(2) Take off the original glass.
P. 4-15"4.3.1 Original glass"
(3) Move the carriage-1 to the right side.

Fig. 4-61

Notes:
Rotate the drive pulley to move the carriage.

Drive pulley

Fig. 4-62

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 22
(4) Remove the seal and then disconnect 1
connector.

Seal
4

Fig. 4-63
(5) Remove 3 screws, and take off the Exposure
lamp cooling fan-2.
Notes:
When installing the fan, do not tighten the
screw too much.

Exposure lamp
cooling fan-2
Fig. 4-64

4.3.9 Upper exhaust fan (left) (F29)

(1) Take off the top rear cover.


P. 4-7"4.1.20 Top rear cover"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector. Purple

Notes:
When connecting the connector of the upper
exhaust fan (left), be sure that you do not Purple
use the wrong one.

Fig. 4-65

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 23
(3) Take off the upper exhaust fan (left).

Upper exhaust fan (left)

Fig. 4-66

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 24
4.3.10 Upper exhaust fan (right) (F30)

(1) Take off the top rear cover.


P. 4-7"4.1.20 Top rear cover"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector. Black

Notes:
When connecting the connector of the upper
exhaust fan (right), be sure that you do not Black
use the wrong one.

Fig. 4-67
(3) Take off the upper exhaust fan (right).

Upper exhaust fan (right)

Fig. 4-68

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 25
4.3.11 Lens unit

[A] Lens unit

(1) Remove the lens cover.


P. 4-16"4.3.2 Lens cover" Lens unit
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 4
screws, then take off the lens unit.
Notes:
1. When installing the lens unit, fix it while
pushing it to the rear direction.
2. The lens unit must not be readjusted and
some part of its components must not be
replaced in the field since the unit is
precisely adjusted. If any of the
components is defective, replace the
whole unit.
Fig. 4-69

3. Do not touch 8 screws shown with the


arrows when replacing the lens unit.

Fig. 4-70

4. Handle the unit with care. Do not touch


the adjusted area and lens. (Hold the unit
as the right figure.)

Fig. 4-71

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 26
[B] Installation of lens unit

(1) Attach the lens unit and fix it temporarily with


2 screws. [Rear]
(2) Match the center scale of the plate in which
the unit is to be installed and the rightmost Screw
scale of the adjusting hole on the lens unit
plate.

[Front]

Fig. 4-72
(3) Tighten 4 screws securely to fix the lens unit
while pushing it to the rear side. [Rear]

Screw

Screw
[Front]

Fig. 4-73

4.3.12 Scan motor (M1)

(1) Remove the RADF.


(2) Take off the top rear cover.
P. 4-7"4.1.20 Top rear cover"
Bracket
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket.

Fig. 4-74

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 27
(4) Release the harness from the harness
clamp. Scan motor
(5) Remove 3 screws and take off the scan
motor with the whole bracket.
Notes:
When installing the scan motor, be sure to
perform the belt tension adjustment.
P. 6-82"6.6.2 Belt tension adjustment of
the Scan motor"

Screw
Fig. 4-75

4.3.13 Carriage-1

(1) Take off the original glass.


P. 4-15"4.3.1 Original glass"
(2) Take off the top rear cover.
P. 4-7"4.1.20 Top rear cover"
(3) Take off the top front cover.
P. 4-2"4.1.5 Top front cover"
(4) Move the carriage and position the holes of
the carriage to the holes of the frame.
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the brackets
fixing the carriage-1 to the wire.

Fig. 4-76
(6) Remove the square seal fixing the lamp
harness to the base. Disconnect the Connector Seal
connector of the lamp harness from the SLG
board

Fig. 4-77

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 28
Notes:
Be sure to install the lamp harness by Lamp harness Lamp harness
following the procedure below. Black Line
1. Clean the seal adhering surface with
alcohol.
2. Align the black line on the lamp harness
with the position as shown in the figure, Hole
and fix it with a seal.
Punched mark Seal

Fig. 4-78

3. Align the bent portion of the lamp harness


with the position as shown in the figure,
and fix it with a seal. Lamp harness
Seal
4. After the installation, move carriage-1
towards the left and confirm that there is
no abnormality in the lamp harness, such
as twisting.

Punched mark

Fig. 4-79
(7) Rotate the carriage-1 in the direction shown
in the figure at right, not to touch the mirror.
Then take off the carriage-1.
Notes:
When replacing the mirror-1, replace the
carriage-1 together with mirror-1.
Mirror-1 should not be removed.

Fig. 4-80

Notes:
(A)
When installing carriage-1, fix the bracket
temporarily at the position (A). Then move it
to the direction (B), push it to the end and fix
securely.

(B)

(A)
Fig. 4-81

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 29
4.3.14 Inverter board (INV)

(1) Take off the carriage-1.


P. 4-28"4.3.13 Carriage-1"
Inverter board Inverter cover
(2) Disconnect 2 connectors.
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the inverter
cover and inverter board.

Fig. 4-82
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the inverter
board.

Inverter board

Fig. 4-83

4.3.15 Carriage wire / carriage-2

[A] Carriage wire / carriage-2

(1) Take off the carriage-1.


P. 4-28"4.3.13 Carriage-1"
(2) Attach the wire holder jigs to the pulleys to
prevent the wires from loosening.

Fig. 4-84

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 30
Notes:
1. When the wire holder jig is attached, Arm
make sure that the wire is not shifted or
loosened.
2. The wire should come out of the slot of
the wire holder jig and be passed under
the arm of it.
Wire holder jig

Wire holder jig 4

Fig. 4-85
(3) Detach the tension springs of the front and
rear sides.
Tension spring
(4) Remove the carriage wires.

Tension spring

Fig. 4-86
(5) Rotate the carriage-2 in the direction where
the inside of the frame is dented shown in (B)
the figure at right, not to touch the mirrors.
Then take off the carriage-2.
Notes:
1. When replacing the mirrors-2 and -3,
replace the carriage-2 together with
mirrors-2 and -3. Mirrors-2 and -3 should
not be removed.
2. When installing carriage-2, fix the front
bracket temporarily and move it in the
direction of (B) after the wires are
installed. Then push it to the end and fix it
securely. Fig. 4-87
( P. 4-29"Fig. 4-81 ")

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 31
[B] Installing carriage wires

(1) When replacing the carriage wires, refer


illustrations below: [Front]
Carriage-2
Notes: Carriage wire
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not
necessary since a certain tension is applied Bracket for carriage-1
to the carriage wires by the tension
springs.Make sure the tension applied to the
Idler pulley
wire is normal.
Wire pulley Hook

Tension spring

Fig. 4-88

[Rear]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire

Bracket for carriage-1

Hook
Idler pulley
Wire pulley
Tension spring

Fig. 4-89

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 32
[C] Winding the wires around the wire pulley

(1) Pull the Ø3 ball terminal located at the center


2 turns 4 turns
of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. [Rear]
One end of the wire with a hook attached
comes to the outside.
(2) Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the
front and rear sides. The number of turns to
be wound are as follows:
• 2 turns toward the opposite side of the
boss Ball terminal
• 4 turns toward the boss side No space between turns 4
Notes: Hook
Pay attention to the followings when the Color: Silver
wires are wound around the pulleys:
• Do not twist the wire. Fig. 4-90
• Wind the wires tightly so that they are in
complete contact with the surface of the 4 turns 2 turns
[Front]
pulleys.
• Each turn should be pushed against the
previously wound turn so that there is no
space between them.

Ball terminal
No space between turns
Hook

Color: Black
Fig. 4-91
(3) After winding the wires around the pulleys,
attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the
wires. Arm

Notes:
1. When the wire holder jig is attached,
make sure that the wire is not shifted or
loosened.
2. The wire should come out of the slot of Wire holder jig
the wire holder jig and be passed under
the arm of it.

Wire holder jig

Fig. 4-92

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 33
4.3.16 Carriage home position sensor (S6)

(1) Take off the top rear cover.


P. 4-7"4.1.20 Top rear cover"
(2) Remove the seal.
(3) Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latches
and take off the carriage home position
sensor.

Carriage
home position sensor
Fig. 4-93

4.3.17 Platen sensor (S7)

(1) Remove the RADF.


(2) Take off the top rear cover.
P. 4-7"4.1.20 Top rear cover" Platen sensor
(3) Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latches
and take off the platen sensor.

Fig. 4-94

4.3.18 SLG board (SLG)

(1) Open the RADF.


(2) Take off the lens cover.
P. 4-16"4.3.2 Lens cover"
(3) Disconnect 10 connectors, remove 4 screws
and take off the SLG board. SLG board

Fig. 4-95

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 34
4.4 Laser Optical Unit

4.4.1 Laser optical unit

(1) Take off the front lower cover.


P. 4-1"4.1.1 Front lower cover"
(2) Take off the left middle cover.
P. 4-4"4.1.9 Left middle cover"
Notes:
When installing the laser optical unit, attach
the left middle cover before the rear cover
4
since the former may catch the flat cable.
(3) Disconnect 3 connectors and release the
harness from 2 harness clamps.
(4) Remove 2 harness clamps.

Fig. 4-96
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1
harness clamp. Then remove 1 screw and a
grounding terminal to take off the bracket.

Fig. 4-97
(6) Install the removed harness clamp in the
hole of the frame.

Fig. 4-98

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 35
(7) Disconnect 4 flat cables from the LGC board.
Then remove 2 flat cable clamps on the
frame. C K

Notes:
When installing, be sure to connect the flat
cables at the proper positions.
Y M

Fig. 4-99

Notes:
When installing, be sure to align its black line
with the edge of the equipment.

Black line

Fig. 4-100
(8) Remove 2 screws and then take off the EPU
cooling fan duct.

Fig. 4-101
(9) Release 1 latch and then take off the ozone
suctioning fan duct.

Fig. 4-102

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 36
(10) Pull out the EPU together with the transfer
belt. Then remove 2 screws.
Notes:
When reassembling, make sure the bosses
of the laser optical unit is securely inserted
into the hole of the plate.

Fig. 4-103
(11) Slide the laser optical unit to the rear side
and then quietly pull out the unit towards the
paper exit side.
Notes:
When the laser optical unit is replaced, start
the equipment in the adjustment mode (05)
and perform the code 4721 before the
normal start-up.

Fig. 4-104

Notes:
1. Do not leave fingerprints or stains on the
slit glass of the laser optical unit.
2. Pay close attention not to cause any
impact to the laser optical unit because it
is a precision apparatus.
3. Place the removed laser optical unit so as
B A
not to cause any load for the polygonal
motor.
4. Do not disassemble the laser optical unit
in the field because it is precisely
adjusted and very sensitive to dust and
stains.
5. In the case of the laser optical unit, Fig. 4-105
horizontally hold the parts A and B shown
in the figure. Be careful not to apply
pressure to the top of the unit (the cover)
with your hands, etc. because the slit
glass and the polygonal motor are
installed in this section.
6. When the laser optical unit has been
taken off, keep the shutter closed unless
otherwise required.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 37
4.4.2 Laser optical unit cooling fan (front) (F22)

(1) Take off the front lower cover.


P. 4-1"4.1.1 Front lower cover"
(2) Take off the right corner cover.
P. 4-8"4.1.22 Right corner cover"
(3) Pull out the process unit.
P. 4-91"4.6.1 Pulling out the process unit [2]
(EPU tray)"
(4) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and release
the harness from the harness clamp [2].

[1]

Fig. 4-106

Notes:
When installing the laser optical unit cooling
duct to the equipment, set its harness as
shown in the figure.

Fig. 4-107
(5) Release 1 rocking support.

Fig. 4-108

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 38
(6) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-109
(7) Take off the laser optical unit cooling duct by
rotating it as shown in the figure.

Laser optical unit


cooling duct
Fig. 4-110
(8) Release 4 latches and take off the case.
Notes: Case
When taking off the case, do not pull any
harness which is coming out of the hole in
the case.

Latch

Latch

Fig. 4-111
(9) Take off the laser optical unit cooling fan
(front).
Laser optical unit
cooling fan (front)

Fig. 4-112

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 39
4.4.3 Laser optical unit cooling fan (rear) (F23)

(1) Take off the PFC board cover.


P. 9-8"9.1.9 PFC board case"
(2) Release the harness from 2 harness clamps.

Fig. 4-113
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2
screws, and then take off the laser optical
unit cooling duct. Laser optical unit
cooling duct

Fig. 4-114
(4) Release 2 latches and take off the duct
cover. Latch
(5) Take off the laser optical unit cooling fan
(rear). Latch
Duct cover

Laser optical unit


cooling fan (rear)

Fig. 4-115

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 40
4.4.4 Shutter

(1) Remove the laser optical unit.


P. 4-35"4.4.1 Laser optical unit" A Shutter motor
(2) If the shutter is closed, rotate the shutter
motor section to open it. Shutter
A: Shutter closed
B: Shutter opened

B
4

Fig. 4-116
(3) Remove the shutter.
Shutter

Fig. 4-117

4.4.5 Shutter motor

(1) Remove the laser optical unit.


P. 4-35"4.4.1 Laser optical unit"
Notes:
Make sure that the shutter is closed.
(2) Remove 2 screws and disconnect 1 connector.
(3) Take off the shutter motor.

Shutter motor
Fig. 4-118

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 41
4.4.6 Shutter sensor (home position)

(1) Remove the laser optical unit.


P. 4-35"4.4.1 Laser optical unit"
(2) Remove the shutter.
P. 4-41"4.4.4 Shutter"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector.‘

Fig. 4-119
(4) Release 2 latches and take off the shutter
sensor (home position). Shutter sensor
(home position)

Latch

Fig. 4-120

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 42
4.4.7 Shutter sensor (end position)

(1) Remove the laser optical unit.


P. 4-35"4.4.1 Laser optical unit"
(2) Remove the shutter.
P. 4-41"4.4.4 Shutter"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector.

Fig. 4-121
(4) Release 2 latches and take off the shutter
sensor (end position). Shutter sensor
(end position)

Latch

Fig. 4-122

4.4.8 Disassembly and replacement of the Polygonal motor


Notes:
Polygonal motor replacement is not recommended in the field; the image quality is not
guaranteed in such a case.

(1) Take off the laser optical unit. (Refer to


SERVICE MANUAL P. 4-35"4.4.1 Laser
optical unit")

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 43
(2) Remove 3 screws and take off the polygonal
motor cover.
Polygonal motor cover

Fig. 4-123

Notes:
Glass
1. Treat the polygonal motor gently.
2. Never touch the surface of the polygonal
mirror or glass.If you do so, wipe the dirt
off using a clean and soft cloth, taking
care not to scratch the surface.

Polygonal mirror

Fig. 4-124
(3) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 4 screws
and then take off the polygonal motor.
Notes: Connector
1. Check that all 4 fixing screws for the
polygonal motor contact the base before
fixing the motor.
2. When installing the polygonal motor,
neither hold the condenser (element) on
the board nor damage the mirror with a
screwdriver.

Polygonal motor

Fig. 4-125

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 44
4.5 Paper Feeding System

4.5.1 Bypass feed tray

(1) Take off the duplexing unit front cover.


P. 4-5"4.1.13 Duplexing unit front cover"
(2) Take off the duplexing unit rear cover.
P. 4-5"4.1.14 Duplexing unit rear cover"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.

4
Connector

Fig. 4-126
(4) Lift up the hinge slightly and then take off the
bypass tray.
Notes:
When installing or taking off the bypass tray,
keep it setting up because it is tensed with a
spring.

Bypass feed tray

Fig. 4-127

4.5.2 Bypass feed unit

(1) Take off the bypass feed tray.


P. 4-45"4.5.1 Bypass feed tray"
(2) Open the duplexing unit.
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the SFB lower
cover.
Notes:
When the optional LCF is installed, be sure
to install the cover with the duplexing unit
opened wider than the LCF.

SFB lower cover


Fig. 4-128

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 45
(4) Disconnect 4 connectors and remove 2
screws. Then take off the bypass feed unit.

Bypass feed unit

Fig. 4-129

4.5.3 Bypass pickup solenoid (SOL8)

(1) Take off the bypass feed unit.


P. 4-45"4.5.2 Bypass feed unit" Bypass pickup solenoid
(2) Remove a spring and 2 screws. Then take
off the bypass pickup solenoid together with
its link arm. Spring

Fig. 4-130

4.5.4 Bypass paper sensor (S71)

(1) Take off the bypass pickup solenoid.


P. 4-46"4.5.3 Bypass pickup solenoid
(SOL8)"
(2) Take off the actuator.

Actuator

Fig. 4-131

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 46
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the bypass paper
sensor.

Bypass paper sensor 4

Fig. 4-132

4.5.5 Bypass pickup roller

(1) Remove 2 screws and then take off the SFB


upper cover.

SFB upper cover

Fig. 4-133
(2) Remove 1 clip and pull out the shaft. Then
take off the bypass pickup roller.

Bypass pickup roller

Fig. 4-134

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 47
4.5.6 Bypass upper unit

(1) Take off the bypass feed unit.


P. 4-45"4.5.2 Bypass feed unit"
(2) Remove 4 screws, and then take off the
bracket.

Bracket

Fig. 4-135
(3) Remove 1 E-ring, 1 belt, 1 pulley and 1
bushing.
Bushing

Pulley

Belt
Fig. 4-136
(4) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the
bypass upper unit. Bypass upper unit

Fig. 4-137

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 48
4.5.7 Bypass feed roller

(1) Take off the bypass upper unit.


P. 4-45"4.5.2 Bypass feed unit" Bypass feed roller
(2) Remove the clip and take off the bypass feed
roller.
Notes:
Make sure the following items when
assembling the bypass feed roller.
1. Set the timing belt to the pulley securely.
2. Do not put the wrong position when 4
setting the timing belt.
3. Be sure to insert the clip into the groove
of shaft.
4. Check that there is no stain such as oil on
the surface of timing belt, the pulley and Fig. 4-138
the roller.
5. Install the bypass pickup roller and the
bypass feed roller in the correct direction.

4.5.8 Bypass transport roller

(1) Take off the bypass upper unit.


P. 4-48"4.5.6 Bypass upper unit"
(2) Remove 1 E-ring and slide the bushing to the
inner side. Bushing

Fig. 4-139
(3) Move the shaft to the right side and remove
the left bushing. Then take off the bypass
transport roller.

Bypass transfer roller

Fig. 4-140

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 49
4.5.9 Bypass motor(M12)

(1) Take off the bypass feed unit.


P. 4-45"4.5.2 Bypass feed unit" Bushing
(2) Remove 1 belt, 1 E-ring, 1 pulley and 1
bushing. Belt

Pulley

Fig. 4-141
(3) Remove 1 screw and the grounding wire.

Ground wire

Fig. 4-142
(4) Remove 4 screws and a bracket.

Bracket

Fig. 4-143

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 50
(5) Remove 2 screws and then take off the
bypass motor. Bypass motor

Fig. 4-144

4.5.10 1st drawer idling roller

(1) Take off the bypass feed unit.


P. 4-45"4.5.2 Bypass feed unit" 1st drawer idling roller unit
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the 1st drawer
idling roller unit.

Fig. 4-145
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the roller
assembly. 1st drawer idling roller

Fig. 4-146

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 51
(4) Remove the 2 E-rings and take off the idling
roller.

Fig. 4-147

Notes:
1. When assembling the unit, pay attention
to the orientation of the bracket.
2. After the unit was assembled, perform
position adjustment of the media sensor.

Fig. 4-148

4.5.11 Bypass separation roller

(1) Take off the bypass feed unit.


P. 4-45"4.5.2 Bypass feed unit"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket.

Blacket

Fig. 4-149

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 52
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the SFB lower
unit.

SFB lower unit


4

Fig. 4-150
(4) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws
and take off the SFB lower guide. SFB lower guide

Fig. 4-151
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the SFB lower
guide. Separation roller
Notes:
Make sure not to damage the latch of the
holder.

Fig. 4-152

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 53
4.5.12 Bypass feed sensor (S72)

(1) Take off the SFB lower unit.


P. 4-52"4.5.11 Bypass separation roller"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3 Bypass feed sensor
latches. Then take off the bypass feed
sensor by pushing its actuator.

Fig. 4-153

4.5.13 Bypass paper size detection sensor (S70)

(1) Take off the bypass feed tray.


P. 4-45"4.5.1 Bypass feed tray" Upper tray
(2) Remove 5 screws and take off the upper tray.

Fig. 4-154
(3) Remove 1 screw and remove a plate spring.
Plate spring

Fig. 4-155

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 54
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket.
Blacket

Fig. 4-156
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the bypass paper size Bypass paper size detection sensor
detection sensor.

Fig. 4-157

4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit

(1) Open the duplexing unit and the feed cover.


(2) Remove 1 clip and take off the feed cover.

Fig. 4-158

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 55
(3) Pull out the drawer.
(4) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2
screws. Then take off the drawer feeding
unit.
Notes:
When taking off the drawer feeding unit of
the 1st drawer, perform position adjustment
for the media sensor after the unit was
reinstalled.
P. 6-83"6.7.1 Adjustment of the media
sensor position"
Drawer feeding unit

Fig. 4-159

4.5.15 Feed roller

(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.


P. 4-55"4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit"
(2) Remove 1 clip. Press down the lever and Feed roller
take off the feed roller.

Lever

Fig. 4-160

4.5.16 Pickup roller

(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.


P. 4-55"4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit"
(2) Remove 1 clip and take off the pickup roller. Pickup roller

Fig. 4-161

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 56
4.5.17 Separation roller

(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.


P. 4-55"4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit"
Separation roller
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the paper
guide A.
(3) Remove 1 clip and take off the separation
roller.

Paper guide A

Fig. 4-162

4.5.18 Transport roller

(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.


P. 4-55"4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the paper
guide A.

Paper guide A

Fig. 4-163
(3) Remove 2 screws and 2 holder, and then
take off the paper guide B and paper guide
C.

Holder

Paper guide C
Holder
Paper guide B
Fig. 4-164

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 57
(4) Remove 1 screw and then take off the
bracket.

Bracket

Fig. 4-165
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the sensor cover.

Sensor cover

Fig. 4-166
(6) Remove 1 E-ring and the gear.
Notes:
When assembling the unit, pay attention to
the orientation of the gear.

One-way clutch

Gear

Fig. 4-167
(7) Remove 4 screws, and then take off the
paper guide D.
Notes:
When reassembling, make sure the boss of
the paper guide is securely inserted into the
hole of the plate.

Paper guide D

Fig. 4-168

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 58
(8) Remove 1 E-ring and slide the bearing to the
inner side. Then take off the transport roller.

Transport roller 4

Fig. 4-169

4.5.19 Drawer detection sensor (S73/S81/S89/S97)

(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.


P. 4-55"4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the sensor cover.
Sensor cover

Fig. 4-170
(3) Release 3 latches and take off the drawer
detection sensor.

Drawer detection sensor

Fig. 4-171

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 59
4.5.20 Drawer feed sensor (S78/S86/S94/S102)

(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.


P. 4-55"4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit"
(2) Remove 1 screw and 1 clamp. Then take off
the sensor bracket.

Blacket
Fig. 4-172
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the drawer feed sensor. Drawer feed sensor
Notes:
When installing the sensors, make sure that
the protrusion of each sensor is inserted into
the hole of the bracket securely.

Fig. 4-173

4.5.21 Drawer transport sensor (S77/S85/S93/S101)

(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.


P. 4-55"4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the sensor bracket.

Blacket

Fig. 4-174

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 60
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the drawer transport sensor. Drawer transport sensor
Notes:
When installing the sensors, make sure that
the protrusion of each sensor is inserted into
the hole of the bracket securely.

Fig. 4-175

4.5.22 Drawer empty sensor (S75/S83/S91/S99)

(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.


P. 4-55"4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the drawer empty
sensor.

Drawer empty sensor

Fig. 4-176

4.5.23 Drawer tray-up sensor (S76/S84/S92/S100)

(1) Take off the drawer feeding unit.


P. 4-55"4.5.14 Drawer feeding unit"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the drawer tray-up
sensor.

Drawer tray-up sensor


Fig. 4-177

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 61
4.5.24 Drawer bottom sensor (S74/S82/S90/S98)

(1) Take off all the drawers.


P. 4-68"4.5.33 Drawer"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the drawer bottom
sensor.

Drawer bottom sensor

Fig. 4-178

4.5.25 Registration roller (Rubber)

(1) Take off the 2nd transfer roller front guide.


P. 4-154"4.7.14 2nd transfer unit (TRU)"
(2) Remove 2 screws 2 springs and 2 holders.

Spring Holder

Fig. 4-179
(3) Take off the registration roller (rubber).

Registration roller (rubber)

Fig. 4-180

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 62
(4) Remove 2 holders, 2 bearings, 3 E-rings, 1
gear, 1 ground plate and 1 pin from the Registration roller (rubber)
registration roller.
Notes:
Make sure that the holders and the bearings
are installed in a correct position because
those for the front side differ from those for Bearing
the rear side.

4
Bearing

Fig. 4-181

4.5.26 Paper dust cleaning brush (registration roller)

(1) Take off the 2nd transfer unit.


P. 4-154"4.7.14 2nd transfer unit (TRU)" Paper dust cleaning brush (registration roller)
(2) Remove 2 screws and slide the bracket of
the brush toward you.
(3) Take off the paper dust cleaning brush
quietly not to hit the bracket to the
registration roller.
Notes:
Clean paper dust on the brush, if any.

Fig. 4-182

4.5.27 Registration guide

(1) Open the duplexing unit.


(2) Remove 3 screws and slide the registration Registration guide
guide slightly to the rear side to release the
front hook.

Shoulder screw
Fig. 4-183

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 63
(3) Disconnect 1 connector. Then take off the
registration guide.

Registration guide

Fig. 4-184

4.5.28 Registration sensor (S52)

(1) Take off the registration guide.


P. 4-63"4.5.27 Registration guide" Paper dust receiving tray
(2) Remove 3 screws and the paper dust
receiving tray.

Fig. 4-185
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the registration sensor. Registration sensor

Fig. 4-186

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 64
4.5.29 Registration roller (Metal)

(1) Take off the registration guide.


P. 4-63"4.5.27 Registration guide"
(2) Take off the registration motor.
P. 4-69"4.5.35 Registration motor (M39)"
(3) Take off the laser unit cooling duct.
P. 4-38"4.4.2 Laser optical unit cooling
fan (front) (F22)"
(4) Remove 1 E-ring on the front side and
remove the bearing.
4

Bearing

Fig. 4-187
(5) Take off the registration roller (metal) by
sliding it to the rear side and pulling it out
toward you.
Notes:
When removing the registration roller
(metal), be careful not to hit the roller gear on
the rear side to the frame because it may
scratch the roller.

Registration roller (Metal)

Fig. 4-188

4.5.30 2nd transfer side paper clinging detection sensor (S51)

(1) Take off the 2nd transfer unit.


P. 4-154"4.7.14 2nd transfer unit (TRU)"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Sensor holder
Then take off the sensor holder.

Fig. 4-189

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 65
(3) Remove 1 screw and then take off the 2nd
transfer side paper clinging detection sensor. 2nd transfer side paper clinging detection sensor

Fig. 4-190

Notes:
When installing the sensor holder, screw it in Sensor holder
while pressing it in the direction of the arrow.

Fig. 4-191

4.5.31 Media sensor (S69)

(1) Open the duplexing unit.


(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the SFB lower
cover.
Notes:
When the optional LCF is installed, be sure
to install the cover with the duplexing unit
opened wider than the LCF.

SFB lower cover


Fig. 4-192

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 66
(3) Remove or fully loosen the adjustment
screw.

Screw
4

Fig. 4-193
(4) Disconnect 1 connector.
(5) Remove 1 screw and take off the media
sensor by tilting it down.

Bracket
Fig. 4-194
(6) Disconnect 1 connector.
(7) Remove 2 screw and take off the media
sensor. Dowel

Notes:
1. When the media sensor (S69) is
replaced, perform position adjustment for
a new sensor after it was installed. P.
6-83"6.7.1 Adjustment of the media
sensor position"
2. When installing, be sure that the 2 dowels Media sensor
of the bracket sensor are inserted
correctly.

Fig. 4-195

3. After the sensor is installed, be sure that


both sides of the sensor installation hole Window A
(fig. A) are not in contact with the sensor.

Media sensor

Fig. 4-196

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 67
4.5.32 Feed cover sensor (S114)

(1) Open the feed cover.


(2) Take off the sensor cover by pushing the
latch on its upper side.

Sensor cover

Fig. 4-197
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the feed cover sensor.

Feed cover sensor

Fig. 4-198

4.5.33 Drawer

(1) Pull out the drawer and remove paper in it.


(2) Remove 3 screws and take off the drawer.
Notes:
When installing, engage the left roller of the
drawer with the rail of the equipment, and
then place the right roller on the rail.

Fig. 4-199

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 68
4.5.34 Drawer paper size detection sensor-1/2 (S79/S80/S87/S88/S95/
S96/S103/S104)

(1) Take off all the drawers.


P. 4-68"4.5.33 Drawer" Drawer paper size
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and release 2 hooks. detection sensor-2
Then take off each sensor.

4
Drawer paper size
detection sensor-1

Fig. 4-200

4.5.35 Registration motor (M39)

(1) Open the SYS board case.


P. 9-2"9.1.3 SYS board case"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3
screws. Then take off the registration motor
with the bracket.
Notes:
When installing the motor, make sure that
the belt is hung on the gear and the pulley of
the motor securely.

Registration motor

Fig. 4-201
(3) Remove 2 screws and then take off the
registration motor.

Registration motor

Fig. 4-202

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 69
4.5.36 Feed/transport drive unit

(1) Open the PFC board case.


P. 9-8"9.1.9 PFC board case"
(2) Disconnect 3 connectors and remove 4
screws. Then take off the feed/transport
drive unit.

Feed/transport drive unit

Fig. 4-203

4.5.37 Transport motor-1 (M40)

(1) Take off the feed/transport drive unit.


P. 4-70"4.5.36 Feed/transport drive unit"
Plate
(2) Remove 4 screws and a plate.

Fig. 4-204
(3) Remove 2 screws and then take off the
transport motor-1.

Transport motor-1

Fig. 4-205

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 70
4.5.38 Transport motor-2 (M41)

(1) Take off a plate.


P. 4-70"4.5.37 Transport motor-1 (M40)"
(2) Remove 2 screws and then take off the
transport motor-2.

Transport motor-2

Fig. 4-206

4.5.39 Feed motor (M42)

(1) Take off a plate.


P. 4-70"4.5.37 Transport motor-1 (M40)"
(2) Remove 2 screws and then take off the feed
motor.

Feed motor

Fig. 4-207

4.5.40 Feed/transport motor (M43)

(1) Open the PFC board case.


P. 9-8"9.1.9 PFC board case"
(2) Remove 4 screws and take off the feed/
transport motor [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-208

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 71
4.5.41 Paper feed drive unit

(1) Open the PFC board case.


P. 9-8"9.1.9 PFC board case"
(2) Disconnect 3 connectors and remove 4
screws. Then take off the paper feed drive
unit [1].
Notes:
The number of clutches in the paper feed
drive unit of the Tandem LCF model differs
from that of the 4-drawer model.

[1]

Fig. 4-209

4.5.42 3rd drawer transport clutch (CLT4)/3rd drawer feed clutch (CLT5)
(e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C)

(1) Take off the paper feed drive unit.


P. 4-72"4.5.41 Paper feed drive unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket.
Bracket

Fig. 4-210
(3) Take off the 3rd drawer transport clutch and
3rd drawer feed clutch.
3rd drawer transport clutch

3rd drawer feed clutch


Fig. 4-211

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 72
4.5.43 3rd drawer transport clutch (CLT4)/3rd drawer feed clutch (CLT5)
(e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C)

(1) Take off the paper feed drive unit.


P. 4-72"4.5.41 Paper feed drive unit" [1]
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket[1].

Fig. 4-212
(3) Disconnect 1 connector[1].
Remove 1 bushing[4] and 2 clips[3]. [2]
[3]
Take off the 3rd drawer transport clutch[2].
(4) Disconnect 1 connector[5]. [4]
Remove 1 bushing[4] and 2 clips[3].
Take off the 3rd drawer feed clutch[6].
[1]
[6]
[3]
[4]

[5]

Fig. 4-213

Notes:
• When installing, be sure to align the
protrusion of the clutch to the position
shown in the figure.
• The color of the harnesses for the drawer
transport clutch and for the drawer feed
clutch is different. When installing, be [1]
sure to attach the corresponding harness.
Black: 3rd drawer transport clutch[1]
Red: 3rd drawer feed clutch[2]

[2]
Fig. 4-214

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 73
4.5.44 4th drawer transport clutch (CLT6)/4th drawer feed clutch (CLT7)
(e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C)

(1) Take off the paper feed drive unit.


P. 4-72"4.5.41 Paper feed drive unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket.

Bracket

Fig. 4-215
(3) Take off the 4th drawer transport clutch and
4th drawer feed clutch.

4th drawer transport clutch

4th drawer feed clutch


Fig. 4-216

4.5.45 4th drawer transport clutch (CLT6)/4th drawer feed clutch (CLT7)
(e-STUDIO5560C/6560C/6570C)

(1) Take off the paper feed drive unit.


P. 4-72"4.5.41 Paper feed drive unit"
[1]
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket[1].

Fig. 4-217

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 74
(3) Disconnect 1 connector[1].
Remove 1 bushing[4] and 2 clips[3]. [2]
Take off the 4th drawer transport clutch[2]. [3]
(4) Disconnect 1 connector[5]. [4]
Remove 1 bushing[4] and 2 clips[3].
Take off the 4th drawer feed clutch[6].
[1] [6]
[3]
[4]

4
[5]
Fig. 4-218

Notes:
1. When installing, be sure to align the
protrusion of the clutch to the position
shown in the figure.
2. The color of the harnesses for the drawer
transport clutch and for the drawer feed
clutch is different. When installing, be
sure to attach the corresponding harness. [1]
Yellow: 4th drawer transport clutch[1]
Blue: 4th drawer feed clutch[2]
[2]

Fig. 4-219

4.5.46 Tray-up motor-1 (M44)

(1) Remove the 1st and 2nd drawers.


(2) Take off the PFC board case.
P. 9-8"9.1.9 PFC board case"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 4
screws. Then take off the tray drive unit [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-220

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 75
(4) Place the unit with its coupling up and
release 6 latches to take off the cover.
Notes:
Be careful in taking off the cover because
there is a spring in the tray drive unit.

Spring

Fig. 4-221
(5) Take off the tray-up motor.
Tray-up motor

Fig. 4-222

Notes:
Match the boss of the gear with the hole of
the cover when installing the motor.

Fig. 4-223

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 76
4.5.47 Tray-up motor-2 (M45)

(1) Remove the 3rd and 4th drawers or tandem


LCF.
(2) Take off the FIL board case.
P. 9-21"9.1.18 FIL board"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3
screws. Then take off the tray drive unit [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-224
(4) Place the unit with its coupling up and
release 6 latches to take off the cover.
Notes:
Be careful in taking off the cover because
there is a spring in the tray drive unit.

Spring

Fig. 4-225
(5) Take off the tray-up motor.
Tray-up motor

Fig. 4-226

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 77
Notes:
Match the boss of the gear with the hole of
the cover when installing the motor.

Fig. 4-227

4.5.48 Transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor (S47)

(1) Pull out the transfer belt unit.


P. 4-139"4.7.1 Pulling out the transfer belt
unit"
(2) Remove 1 screw and slide the middle guide
and then release 2 hooks.

Middle guide

Fig. 4-228
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and then take off the
middle guide.

Middle guide

Fig. 4-229

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 78
(4) Release 3 latches and then take off the
transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor. Transfer belt paper clinging detection sensor

Fig. 4-230

4.5.49 Tandem LCF tray-up motor (M46)

(1) Pull out the tandem LCF.


(2) Take off the FIL board case and reactor.
P. 9-21"9.1.18 FIL board"
(3) Take off the switching regulator.
P. 9-18"9.1.15 Switching regulator (PS)"
(4) Take off the PFC board case.
P. 9-8"9.1.9 PFC board case"
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3
screws. Then take off the tandem LCF tray-
up motor unit.

Tandem LCF tray-up motor unit

Fig. 4-231
(6) Release 2 latches and then take off the
coupling [1] and spring [2]. [1]

[2]

Fig. 4-232

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 79
(7) Release 4 latches and then take off the
tandem LCF tray-up motor.
Cover

Tandem LCF
tray-up motor

Fig. 4-233

4.5.50 Tandem LCF end fence motor (M47)

(1) Pull out the tandem LCF.


(2) Take off the FIL board case and reactor.
P. 9-21"9.1.18 FIL board"
(3) Take off the switching regulator.
P. 9-18"9.1.15 Switching regulator (PS)"
(4) Take off the PFC board case.
P. 9-8"9.1.9 PFC board case"
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3
screws. Then take off the tandem LCF end
fence motor unit [1].
Notes: [1]
Do not mix the tandem LCF tray-up motor
and the tandem LCF end fence motor [1]
when installing them. Fig. 4-234

(6) Release 2 latches and then take off the


coupling and spring. Coupling

Spring

Fig. 4-235

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 80
(7) Release 4 latches and then take off the
tandem LCF end fence motor.
Cover

Tandem LCF
end fence motor

Fig. 4-236

4.5.51 Tandem LCF standby unit

(1) Pull out the tandem LCF.


(2) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the
stopper plate.
Stopper plate

Fig. 4-237
(3) Insert the tandem LCF feeding unit.
(4) Remove 3 screws, and then take off the Tandem LCF standby unit
tandem LCF standby unit.

Fig. 4-238

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 81
4.5.52 Tandem LCF feeding unit

(1) Take off the tandem LCF standby unit.


P. 4-81"4.5.51 Tandem LCF standby unit"
(2) Remove 3 screws, and then take off the
tandem LCF feeding unit.

Tandem LCF feeding unit

Fig. 4-239

4.5.53 Stopper opening/closing solenoid (front) (SOL10)/Stopper


opening/closing detection sensor (front) (S110)

(1) Take off the tandem LCF feeding unit.


P. 4-82"4.5.52 Tandem LCF feeding unit" Feeding unit front cover
(2) Remove 4 screws, and then take off the
feeding unit front cover.

Fig. 4-240
(3) Remove 2 screws, release 2 hooks and then
take off the stopper unit. Stopper unit

Notes:
The position of the hook differs depending on
the destination.

Fig. 4-241

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 82
(4) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the
plate.
Plate
Notes:
The direction of the plate differs depending
on the destination (A4/LT). LT

Fig. 4-242
(5) Disconnect 1 connector, and then take off the
stopper opening/closing solenoid (front). Stopper opening/closing detection sensor (front)
(6) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the stopper opening/
closing detection sensor (front).

Stopper opening/closing solenoid (front)


Fig. 4-243

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 83
4.5.54 Stopper opening/closing solenoid (rear)/Stopper opening/closing
detection sensor (rear) (S111)

(1) Take off the tandem LCF feeding unit.


P. 4-82"4.5.52 Tandem LCF feeding unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws, release 2 hooks and then
take off the stopper unit.
Notes:
The position of the hook differs depending on
the destination.

Stopper unit
Fig. 4-244
(3) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the
plate. Plate
Notes:
The direction of the plate differs depending
on the destination (A4/LT). LT

Fig. 4-245
(4) Disconnect 1 connector, and then take off the
stopper opening/closing solenoid (rear). Stopper opening/closing detection sensor (rear)
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the stopper opening/
closing detection sensor (rear).

Stopper opening/closing solenoid (rear)

Fig. 4-246

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 84
4.5.55 Tandem LCF bottom sensor (S107)

(1) Take off the tandem LCF feeding unit.


P. 4-82"4.5.52 Tandem LCF feeding unit" Feeding side tray
(2) Remove 6 screws, and then take off the
feeding side tray.

Fig. 4-247
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the tandem LCF Tandem LCF bottom sensor
bottom sensor.

Fig. 4-248

4.5.56 Standby side tray paper amount detection sensor (S106)

(1) Take off the tandem LCF feeding unit.


P. 4-82"4.5.52 Tandem LCF feeding unit" Plate
(2) Remove 4 screws, and then take off the
plate.

Fig. 4-249

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 85
(3) Remove 3 screws, and then take off the link
arm. Link arm

Fig. 4-250
(4) Remove 1 screw, and then take off the rear
fence. Rear fence

Fig. 4-251
(5) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the
bracket.

Bracket

Fig. 4-252
(6) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the standby side tray Standby side tray paper amount detection sensor
paper amount detection sensor.

Fig. 4-253

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 86
4.5.57 End fence home position sensor (S112)

(1) Pull out the standby unit, and slide the


standby tray to the feeding side.

Fig. 4-254
(2) Remove 1 screw, and then take off the
sensor cover. Sensor cover

Fig. 4-255
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the end fence home End fence home position sensor
position sensor.

Fig. 4-256

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 87
4.5.58 End fence stop position sensor (S113)

(1) Pull out the standby unit.


(2) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the front Front fence
fence.

Fig. 4-257
(3) Remove 1 screw, and then take off the
sensor cover. Sensor cover

Fig. 4-258
(4) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the end fence stop End fence stop position sensor
position sensor.

Fig. 4-259

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 88
4.5.59 Standby side empty sensor (S109)

(1) Take off the tandem LCF feeding unit.


P. 4-82"4.5.52 Tandem LCF feeding unit" Sensor cover
(2) Take off the rear fence.
P. 4-85"4.5.56 Standby side tray paper
amount detection sensor (S106)"
(3) Remove 1 screw, and then take off the
sensor cover.

Fig. 4-260
(4) Remove 2 screws, and then take off the
sensor bracket. Standby side empty sensor
(5) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches. Then take off the standby side
empty sensor.

Fig. 4-261

4.5.60 Standby side tray detection sensor (S108)

(1) Take off the tandem LCF standby unit.


P. 4-81"4.5.51 Tandem LCF standby unit" Standby side tray detection sensor
(2) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw and
then take off the bracket.
(3) Release 3 latches and then take off the
standby side tray detection sensor.

Bracket

Fig. 4-262

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 89
4.5.61 Tandem LCF solenoid (SOL9)

(1) Take off the transport roller.


P. 4-57"4.5.18 Transport roller"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screw and
then take off the Tandem LCF solenoid.

Tandem LCF solenoid


Fig. 4-263

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 90
4.6 Process Unit Related Section

4.6.1 Pulling out the process unit (EPU tray)

(1) Take off the front lower cover.


P. 4-1"4.1.1 Front lower cover" Right TBU lifting lever
(2) Loosen the fixing screw of the right TBU
lifting lever to unfix it.

Fig. 4-264
(3) Pull out the left TBU lifting lever toward you
until it reaches to a mark. Left TBU lifting lever

Mark

Fig. 4-265
(4) Turn the right TBU lifting lever to the left for
90 degrees.
(5) Turn the TBU locking lever for 45 degrees Right TBU lifting lever
(right hand).
2 1

TBU locking lever

Fig. 4-266

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 91
(6) Lift up the EPU locking lever.
EPU locking lever

Fig. 4-267
(7) Turn the EPU locking lever for 90 degrees.
EPU locking lever

Fig. 4-268
(8) Pull out the process unit by holding the EPU
locking lever.
Process unit

Fig. 4-269

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 92
Notes:
1. When the process unit is pulled out, be
sure to close the shutter of the sub-
hopper to prevent dust from entering into
the unit.

Shutter
4

Fig. 4-270

2. When the process unit is pulled out, clean


toner or dirt on the entrance of the waste
toner transport path on the equipment
side or on the toner supply opening of the
sub-hopper and stay, if there is any.

Fig. 4-271

3. Before you push the process unit back,


make sure that each lever is set as shown Left TBU lifting lever TBU locking lever
in the figure.
4. Turn the right TBU lifting lever downward
to unlock the TBU locking lever.

Right TBU lifting lever


Mark

Fig. 4-272

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 93
Notes:
Do not install the process unit with too much Stud Hole
force. Follow the procedure below when
installing the process unit.
1. Hold the levers on both sides and insert
the EPU tray slowly until it seems to
stop.(The stud should be inserted into the
hole of the frame.)In this case, the levers
face the inside.

Fig. 4-273

2. Place your hands in the position indicated


by the arrows below, and push it well.

Fig. 4-274

3. Turn both levers outside by 90 degrees


and push them down. 1

Fig. 4-275

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 94
4.6.2 Drum cleaner unit

(1) Pull out the process unit.


P. 4-91"4.6.1 Pulling out the process unit Drum cleaner unit
(EPU tray)"
(2) Take off the drum cleaner unit quietly not to
hit the drum to the surrounding parts.

Fig. 4-276

Notes:
When you hold the drum cleaner unit, hold
A
the part A shown in the figure. Do not touch
the part B because grease will adhere to
your hands.

Fig. 4-277

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 95
Notes:
1. When installing, place the drum cleaner Drum cleaner unit
unit by keeping it horizontal. In e-
STUDIO6550C/6570C, make sure to
install the correct position since it differs
depending on whether there is the V0
sensor or not.

Fig. 4-278

2. Confirm that the unit is placed horizontally


by holding 4 sections (shown in the
figure) securely and checking that no
lifting is found at each section.

Fig. 4-279

3. When installing the drum cleaner unit, be Shutter Close Shutter Open
Label
sure that the orange label attached on the
shutter is clearly seen.

Fig. 4-280

Notes:
The respective colors are separate in the
A
drum cleaner unit.
Only the location with the same color as the
EPU tray cannot be installed.
When installing, check that the colors match.
[1] Black, [2] Blue, [3] Peach, [4] Yellow. B

Fig. 4-281

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 96
4.6.3 Drum

(1) Take off the drum cleaner unit


P. 4-95"4.6.2 Drum cleaner unit" Drum holder
(2) Take off the main charger unit. Drum
P. 4-99"4.6.6 Main charger unit"
(3) Take off 2 drum holders. Drum holder
(4) Take off the drum by lifting it up straight.

Fig. 4-282

Notes:
Do not install the drum in a wrong direction.
Do not touch the drum flange on the rear
side (shown in grey in the figure) because
grease will adhere to your hands.

Front Rear

Fig. 4-283

4.6.4 Drum cleaning blade

(1) Take off the main charger unit.


P. 4-99"4.6.6 Main charger unit"
(2) Take off the drum.
P. 4-97"4.6.3 Drum"
(3) Remove 2 screws and then take off the drum
cleaning blade.
Notes:
When replacing the drum cleaning blade,
replace the blade side seal too if the
conditions of the blade side seal are as
follows:
• If the flock on the surface layer of blade Drum cleaning blade
side seal has peeled off and the sponge
of the layer below protrudes. Fig. 4-284
• If not in accordance with P. 4-98"Fig. 4-
286" and P. 4-98"Fig. 4-287" of “4.6.5
Blade side seal”.

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 97
4.6.5 Blade side seal

(1) Take off the drum cleaning blade.


P. 4-97"4.6.4 Drum cleaning blade" Blade side seal
(2) Take off the blade side seal.

Fig. 4-285

Notes:
When replacing the blade side seals, follow Side seal Side seal
the procedure below.
1. Move the blade to the front side and then

0 mm

0 mm
install it with 2 screws.
2. Install the 2 blade side seals following the Blade Blade
standard shown in the figure.
0~0.3 mm 0~0.3 mm

Fig. 4-286

3. After the side seals are attached, move


the bracket retaining the blade and check
that it is neither caught nor comes up on
to the side seal.

Blade side seal

Drum cleaning blade

Fig. 4-287

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 98
4.6.6 Main charger unit

(1) Take off the drum cleaner unit.


P. 4-95"4.6.2 Drum cleaner unit"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and release 2
latches. Then take off the main charger unit.

4
Main charger unit

Fig. 4-288

4.6.7 Main charger grid

(1) Take off the Main charger unit [1].


P. 4-99"4.6.6 Main charger unit" [2]
[1]
(2) Take off the main charger grid by pulling the
lever of the holder. [2] e-STUDIO6550C/
6570C:K, [3] Other.
Notes:
The shape of the grid is different only in e-
[3]
STUDIO6550C/6570C: K.
[2]: Only e-STUDIO6550C/6570C: K
[3]: Others

Fig. 4-289

4.6.8 Needle electrode cleaner

(1) Take off the main charger grid.


P. 4-99"4.6.6 Main charger unit" Needle electrode cleaner
(2) Take off the needle electrode cleaner.

Fig. 4-290

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 99
4.6.9 Needle electrode

(1) Take off the needle electrode cleaner.


P. 4-99"4.6.8 Needle electrode cleaner" Needle electrode
(2) Remove the holder and then take off the
needle electrode.

Fig. 4-291

4.6.10 Discharge LED (ERS-K/ERS-C/ERS-M/ERS-Y)

(1) Take off the main charger unit.


P. 4-99"4.6.6 Main charger unit"
(2) Remove the discharge LED from the
protrusion of the charger case and take it off
by sliding it.

Discharge LED

Fig. 4-292

4.6.11 Sub-hopper

(1) Pull out the process unit.


P. 4-91"4.6.1 Pulling out the process unit
(EPU tray)"
(2) Disconnect 4 connectors.
(3) Release 4 hooks on the both sides.
(4) Release 4 hooks on the front and back side.
(5) Release the harness from 2 hooks, and take
out the sub-hopper [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-293

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 100
4.6.12 Sub-hopper toner sensor (S38/S39/S40/S41)

(1) Take off the sub-hopper.


P. 4-100"4.6.11 Sub-hopper"
(2) Discharge toner. Holder

Notes:
When taking off the sensor while toner is still
in the sub-hopper, be careful not to spill the
toner out of the sub-hopper.
If the toner surface is higher than the sensor
installation position, it is recommended to 4
mix the toner by rotating the gear.
(3) Release 1 lock and take off the holder by
tilting it.

Fig. 4-294
(4) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw.
Then take off the sub-hopper toner sensor.
Sub-hopper toner sensor

Fig. 4-295

4.6.13 EPU cover

(1) Take off the sub-hopper.


P. 4-100"4.6.11 Sub-hopper" EPU cover
(2) Remove 6 screws and release 5 latches.
Then pull out the EPU cover toward you.

Fig. 4-296

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 101
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the EPU
cover.
EPU cover

Fig. 4-297

4.6.14 Sub-hopper toner motor (K/C/M/Y) (M19/M20/M21/M22)

(1) Take off the EPU cover.


P. 4-101"4.6.13 EPU cover"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2
screws. Then take off the motor bracket.
Notes:
The shape of the bracket for K differs from
those for Y, M and C.

Motor bracket

Fig. 4-298
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the sub-
hopper toner motor. Sub-hopper toner motor
Notes:
Pay attention to the size (length) of the
screws. If incorrect ones are used, the motor
could be damaged.

Screw

Fig. 4-299

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 102
4.6.15 EPU PC board

(1) Take off the EPU cover.


P. 4-101"4.6.13 EPU cover"
(2) Disconnect 7 connectors.

EPU board

Fig. 4-300
(3) Remove 4 screws and then take off the EPU
board.

EPU board

Fig. 4-301

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 103
4.6.16 Drum surface potential sensors control PC board (V0S board) (e-
STUDIO6550C/6570C only)

(1) Take off the EPU cover.


P. 4-101"4.6.13 EPU cover"
(2) Disconnect 3 connectors.

Drum surface potential sensors


control PC board

Fig. 4-302
(3) Remove 2 screws and then take off the V0S
board.

Drum surface potential sensors control PC board


Fig. 4-303

4.6.17 Auger lock detection sensor (S42)

(1) Take off the EPU cover.


P. 4-101"4.6.13 EPU cover"
(2) Rotate the auger to escape the actuator from
the sensor.

Actuator

Fig. 4-304

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 104
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches and then take off the auger lock
detection sensor.

Auger lock detection sensor


4

Fig. 4-305

4.6.18 Main charger ozone exhaust fan-K/-C/-M/-Y (F17/F1/F19/F20)

(1) Take off the EPU cover.


P. 4-101"4.6.13 EPU cover"
(2) Release 2 latches and take off the waste
toner duct.

Waste toner duct

Fig. 4-306
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and then take off the
main charger ozone exhaust fan by sliding it. Main charger ozone exhaust fan
Notes:
Do not mix the duct of the fan for Y color with
others because its form differs from that of
others.

Fig. 4-307

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 105
4.6.19 Needle electrode cleaner detection sensor-K/C/M/Y (S30/S31/S32/
S33)

(1) Take off the drum cleaner unit.


P. 4-95"4.6.2 Drum cleaner unit" Needle electrode cleaner detection sensor
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and release 3
latches and then take off the needle
electrode cleaner detection sensor.

(K)
(C)
(M)
(Y)

Fig. 4-308

4.6.20 Needle electrode cleaner motor-K/-C/-M/-Y (M23/M24/M25/M26)

(1) Take off the process unit.


P. 4-110"4.6.24 Developer unit" Motor holder
(2) Release 2 hooks. Then lift up the motor
holder.
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and then take off the
motor holder.

Fig. 4-309
(4) Release 2 hooks and then take off the duct.

Duct

Fig. 4-310

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 106
(5) Remove 2 gears.

Gear

Fig. 4-311
(6) Release 1 lock and then take off the needle
electrode cleaner motor.
Notes:
When installing the motor, engage the
locking part with the recessed part of the
motor.

Needle electrode cleaner motor

Fig. 4-312

4.6.21 V0 sensor shutter solenoid (K) (SOL) (e-STUDIO6550C/6570C


only)

(1) Take off the EPU cover


P. 4-101"4.6.13 EPU cover"
(2) Disconnect 3 connectors.

Fig. 4-313

© 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 107
(3) Release 1 hook and remove a stay.
Notes: Stay
Hold the upper side of the stay. Avoid
touching its shutter.

Fig. 4-314
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the solenoid
holder by sliding it. Solenoid holder

Fig. 4-315
(5) Disconnect the joint of the link arm and then
remove the link arm from the shutter.

Link arm

Fig. 4-316
(6) Release the harness from the harness holder
and then take off the V0 sensor shutter
solenoid.

Fig. 4-317

e-STUDIO5540C/6540C/6550C/5560C/6560C/6570C © 2011 - 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


DISASSEMBLY and REPLACEMENT
4 - 108

You might also like